Reasoning Book.pdf

www.BankExamsToday.com

Reasoning Made Easy By Ramandeep Singh

REASONING REASON ING MADE EASY

www.BankEx www.B ankExamsT amsToday. oday.com com

Index Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 Chapter 21 Chapter 22

Puzzles Input Output Data Sufficiency Sitting Arrangements Syllogism Blood Directions Analogy Coded Inequalit y Coding Decoding Decision Making Direction Sense Letter and Number Series Logical Arrangement Mathematical Operations Odd Man Out Series Ranking Based problems Arithmatic Reasoning Classification Dice Problem Statement and Arguments Statement and Assumptions Statement and Conclusions

2



Chapter-1 Puzzles Directions (Q. 1-2) 1-2) Study the following following information information carefully and answer the the question given below: In one floor of a building there are eight flats – A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H in two rows. rows. One One row of of flats flats faces faces north north and and the the other other row row faces faces south south.. D is exact exactly ly opposite of F which faces North. Neither A nor C faces South. A is not at any ends and is second to the left of F. E is exactly opposite of B which faces South. G is third to the right of D. 1.

Which Whic h of the the foll follow owin ing g pair pairss of flat flatss faci facing ng sou south are are at the the two two ends ends?? a) GD b) GH c) BH d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

2.

Which Whic h of of the the foll follow owin ing g pai pairs rs of flat flatss fac facin ing g Nor North th are are at at the the two two end ends? s? a) EA b) EC c) CF d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

Directions Directions (Q. (Q. 3-4) Study the the following following informat information ion to answer answer the given given questions: In a five letter letter English word word (which may or may may not be a meaningful meaningful English word), there are two letters between L and P. S is not placed immediately next to L. There is only one letter between S and A. S is towards the right of A. S is not placed immediately next to E. 3.

Which Whic h of of the the foll follow owin ing g is is cor corre rect ct wit with h res respe pect ct to the the wor word d thu thuss form formed ed?? a) E is at one of the extreme ends of the word b) P is not placed immediately next to A c) There are two letters between A and E in the word thus formed d) P is placed second to the right of E e) None of correc correctt

4. Whic Wh ich h of of the the foll follow owin ing g wor words ds will will be form formed ed base based d on on the the given iven conditions? a) SPAEL b) PEALS c) LEAPS d) SEPAL e) LAPSE

Directions (Q. (Q. 5-9) Study the following information and answer answer the given given questions.

3



Eight chemicals chemicals A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H, contained in eight different different bottles, are placed around a circular table in such a manner that the t he tap fixed to each bottle is directed outward from the centre of the table. Each chemical is opf a different colour, viz Blue, Blue, Yellow, Orange, Orange, White, Green, Violet, Brown and and Black, but not necessarily in the same order. i) ii) ii) iii) iv) iv) v) vi) vi) vii) vii) viii) viii) ix) ix) x) xi) xi)

Chemic emical al B is place laced d thir third d to the the righ ight of Chem hemical ical D. The The Yel Yello low w ch chemic emical al is pla place ced d on on the the imm immedia ediate te left left of of chem chemic ical al B. The co colour of of ch chemical B is not wh white. Chemic emical al F is is place laced d fo fourth rth to to th the lef leftt of of ch chemic emicaal A. A. Neit Neithe herr che chem mical ical F nor nor chem chemica icall A is an imme immedi diat atee nei neigh ghbo bour ur of chem chemic ical al B. The The col colou ourr of of chem chemic ical al C is vio viole lett and and is plac placed ed thir third d to to the the left left of of the the Yellow chemical. The Green Green chemi chemical cal is place placed d seco second nd to the the rig right ht of the the viol violet et chemi chemical cal.. The Brown Brown chem chemica icall is placed placed secon second d to to the the right right of chemi chemical cal B. H is is the the Ora Orang ngee che chem mical ical and and is is pla place ced d exa exact ctly ly betw betwee een n che chem mical ical C and and chemical A. The The Blue Blue chem chemic ical al is plac placed ed seco second nd to the the lef leftt of the the Oran Orange ge chem chemic ical al.. Chem Ch emic ical al G is is pla place ced d thir third d to to th the rig right ht of chem chemic ical al C.

5.

Which ich of of th the fo follow llowin ing g ch chemical icalss is is of of Wh White ite co colou lour? a) D b) E c) G d) F e) None of these

6.

What is H’s position a) Third to the the left left b) Second Second to the the left left c) Third to the the right right d) Second Second to the the right right e) Fourth Fourth to the left left

7.

How How man many y chem chemica icall bot bottl tles es are are plac placed ed betw betwee een n chem chemic ical al A and and G (cou (count nted ed from G clockwise)? a) One b) Two c) Three d) Four e) None of these

8.

Four of th the fol follo lowi win ng fiv fivee are are alik alikee in in a cert certaain way way an and he hence nce fro from m a group. Which of the folowing does not belong to that group? a) Violet-Brown b) Black-Green c) Orange-White d) Yellow-Blue e) Green -Yellow

9.

What is the colour of chemical B? a) Blue b) Black d) Can’t say e) None of these

with respect to F?

c) Yellow

4



Directions (Q. 10-14) 10-14) Study the following following information information carefully and answer the question given below: P, Q, R, S, T, V and W are seven friends working in a call centre. Each of them has different day offs offs in a week from Monday to Sunday not necessarily necessarily in the same order. They work in three different shifts I, II and III with at least two of them in each shift. R works in shift II and his day off is not Sunday. P’s day off is Tuesday and he does not work in the same shift with either Q or W. None of those who work in shift I has day off either on Wednesday or on Friday. V workds with only T in shift III. S’s day off is Sunday. V’s day off is immediate next day of that of R’s day off. T’s day off is not on Wednesday. W’s day off is not on the previous day of P’s day off. S works in shift I. Q does not work in the same shift with R and his day off is not on Thursday. 10.

11.

Which of the following is W’s day off? a) Tuesday b) Monday d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) Saturday

Which of the following is R’s day off? a) Friday b) Thursday d) Wednesday e) None of these

c) Tuesday

12. 12.

Which Whic h of of the the foll follow owin ing g gro group upss of of ffri rien ends ds work work in shif shiftt II? II? a) RP b) RV c) QWS d) Data inadequate e) None of these

13.

Which of the following is Q’s day off? a) Friday b) Wednesday d) Monday e) None of these

14. 14.

c) Thursday

Which Whic h of of the the foll follow owin ing g gro group upss of of ffri rien ends ds work work in shif shiftt I? a) RV b) RP c) QWS d) Data inadequate e) None of these

Directions (Q. (Q. 15-18) Read the following passage carefully and and answer the question given below it. Six friends Abhishek, Deepak, Mridul, Pritam, Ranjan and Salil married within a year in the months of February, April, July, September, November and December and in the cities of Ahmedabad, Bengaluru, Chennai, Delhi, Mumbai and Kolkata but but not necessarily necessarily following the above order. order. The brides names were 5

REASONING MADE EASY


Geetika, Jasmine, Hema, Brinda, Ipsita and veena, once again not following any order. The following are some facts about their weddings. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) 15.

16.

Mridul’s wedding took place in Chennai; however he was not m arried to Geetika or Veena. Abhishek’s wedding took place in Ahmedabad and ranjan’s in Delhi however neither of them was married to Jasmine or Brinda. The wedding in Kolkata took place in February. Hema’s wedding took place in April, but not in Ahmedabad. Geetika and Ipsita got married in February and November and in Chennai and Kolkata but not following the above order. Pritam visited Bengaluru and Kolkata only after his marriage in December. Salil was married to Jasmine to September.

Hema’s husband is a) Abhishek d) Pritam

b) Deepak e) Mridul

Deepak’s wedding took place in a) Bengaluru b) Mumbai d) Delhi e) Chennai

c) Ranjan

c) Kolkata

17.

In Mumbai, the wedding of one of the friends took place in the month of a) April b) September c) November d) December e) July

18.

Salil’s wedding was held in a) Bengaluru b) Chennai d) Delhi e) Mumbai

c) Kolkata

Directions (Q. 19-23) Read the following information carefully to answer the given questions. There are five married couples in a family and there is a child to every couple. Ages of children are 3, 4, 5, 6 and 9 years. Name of males are M, N, O, P and Q. Name of children are A, B, C, D and E. Name of females are V, W, X, Y and Z. Name of M’s child is not C and E and he is not eldest or youngest. Age of X’s child is 6 years and her husband is one among N, O and Q. Age of D is 3 years but she is not a child of O. A’s age is multiple of 3 but she is not a child of M and V. W’s husband is O or Q. Age of Z’s child is 5 years but the name of child is not B or E. V is wife of O. 19.

What is the age of B. a) 4 d) 9

b) 6 e) None of these

c) 5 6

REASONING MADE EASY

20.

What is the name of M’s wife? a) W b) X d) Z e) None of these

21.

Name of Mother, farther and age of E? a) X, N and 6 b) V, O and 9 c) X, O and 6 d) V, N and 9 e) Can’t be determined

22.

What is the name and the age of P’s child? a) B and 6 b) E and 9 c) C and 4 d) C and 5 e) None of these What are the names of Q’s wife and his child? a) W and D b) X and A c) W and C d) X and D e) None of these

23.


c) Y

Directions (Q. 24-27) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions which follow. Five friends A, B, C, D, and E are working in 5 different departments M, N, O, P and Q and they earn different salaries i.e. 10,000, 15,000, 20,000, 25,000 and 30,000 and they all are of different ages i.e. 24, 26, 28, 30 and 32 years. These all informations are not necessarily in the same order. B works in department M and earns more than 20,000. Person who is 28 years old works in department Q. 32 year’s old person earns at least 20,000. The person who is 26 years old earns 25,000. A earns 15,000, but does not work in department N or P. •

•

Person who is 30 years old earns highest salary but does not work in department M and N. E does not work in department P or Q, and his age is not 32. The salary of D is less than 20,000. 24.

Who works in department N? a) B b) C c) D d) E e) Can’t be determined

7

REASONING MADE EASY


25.

If the name of the person represents its salary then which of the following is true? a) A + B = C b) C + D = B c) D + E = B d) A + D = E e) None of these

26.

Which of the following combination is definitely true? a) B-30 years-M-30,000 b) D-24 years-N-10,000 c) A-24 years-P-15,000 d) E-30 years-O-30,000 e) None of these

27.

The person whose age is 30 works in which department? a) M b) N c) O d) P e) None of these

Directions (Q. 28-29) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions which follow: Education is the most important investment one makes in life. Higher studies and specialization in certain fields call for additional financial support from time-to-time. Which of the following can be inferred from the given information? (An inference is something that is not directly stated but can be inferred from the given information) a) People generally lack finances to pay for higher education b) The rich and wealthy sections of our society are unwilling to spend money on the education of their children c) Higher education requires higher amount of money than primary education d) Now-a-days even the poor and needy desire to educate their children e) None of these 28.

Which of the following statements is an assumption implicit in the above given proposition? (An assumption is something supposed or taken for granted) a) Higher education need not much finances as it is subsidized by the government b) Education is one of the most essential parts of one’s life c) Education is mostly neglected in our society d) Specialization in education is most sought after thing today e) None of these 29.

8

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 30-34) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. Six executives Akash, Bipasha, Deepak, Jyoti, Kartik and Priya have to advertise four products, i.e. Soap, watches, computers and chocolates on 3 different channels i.e. go, one and spice either alone or in pairs. An executive can visit only one channel and advertise only one product. Not more than two executives can advertise on a channel. (i) Bipasha and Jyoti both visit the same channel but advertise different product (ii) Akash who visits Go’ advertises neither soap nor computers (iii) Kartik does not advertise chocolates (iv) No girl advertises soap (v) The two executives who advertise chocolates visit spice 30.

31.

Who advertises watches? a) Deepak b) Kartik d) Priya e) None of these

c) Akash

Which channel does Kartik visit? a) Go b) Spice d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

c) One

32.

Which of the following channel product pairs is definitely incorrect? a) Go-Watch b) One-Computer c) Go-Soap d) One-Soap e) One-Watch

33.

What will Jyoti advertise? a) Chocolates b) Watches d) Can’t be determined e) None of these

34.

c) Computers or watches

If Bipasha advertises computers which of the following must be true? a) Jyoti advertises soap b) Jyoti advertises watches c) Kartik advertises computers d) Kartik works for spice e) None of these

Directions (Q. 35-40) Study the following information carefully and answer the following questions. An organisation decided to distribute seven types of laptops on week days starting from Monday to Sunday. The seven laptops to be distributed are of Sony, Acer, Asus, Lenovo, Dell, HP and HCL but non necessarily in the same order. Dell laptops are to be given on Saturday. Lenovo laptops are given just after Asus laptops and Asus laptops are not given on Wednesday. HP laptops are given two days after the distribution of Asus laptop. Acer laptops are distributed just after 9

REASONING MADE EASY


Sony laptop. HCL laptops are distributed before Acer laptops. HP laptops are distributed after Dell laptops. 35.

On which day of the week Lenovo laptops are distributed? a) Tuesday b) Wednesday c) Friday d) Sunday e) None of these

36.

Which laptops are distributed just between the days when Lenovo and HP are distributed? a) Asus b) Dell c) Sony d) HCL e) None of these

37.

Which laptops are distributed on Wednesday? a) Acer b) Lenovo d) HP e) None of these

c) HCL

38.

On which day of the week Asus are distributed? a) Monday b) Sunday c) Tuesday d) Wednesday e) None of these

39.

If HCL is related with Tuesday, Sony is related with Wednesday; similarly Lenovo is related with which day? a) Thursday b) Friday c) Saturday d) Sunday e) None of these

40.

Which laptops are distributed in the middle of the week? a) Acer b) Asus c) Lenovo d) HCL e) None of these

Directions (Q. 41-42) In the following questions below is given a statement followed by two courses of action I and II. On the basis of the information given in the statement, you have to assume everything in the statement to be true, then decide which of the suggested courses of action logically follows for pursuing. Give Answer: a) Only I follow b) Only II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows e) Both I and II follows 41.

Statement: Despite good economic progress of country, significant number of under nourished children has been observed in the rural parts of the country. Courses of action 10

REASONING MADE EASY


I. Government should increase wealth tax and income tax and use that money for up-liftment of the deprived class II. Government should introduce schemes like free meals in primary schools and make primary education compulsory 42.

Statement: The police department has come under a cloth with recent revelations that atleast two senior police officials are suspected to have been involved in the illegal sale of a large quantity of weapons from the state police amoury. Courses of action I. A through investigation should be ordered by the State Government to bring out all those who are involved in the illegal sales of arm. II. State police armoury should be kept under Central Government’s control.

Directions (Q. 43-47) Study the following information and answer the following questions A, B, C, D, E, G and I are seven friends who study in three different standards namely 5th, 6th and 7th such that not less than two friends study in the same standard. Each friend also has a different favourite subject namely History, Civics, English, Marathi, Hindi, Maths and Economics but not necessarily in the same order. A likes Maths and studies in the 5th standard with only one other friend who likes Marathi. I studies with two other friends. Both the friends who study with I like languages (Here, languages include only Hindi, Marathi and English) D studies in the 6 th standard with only one person and does not like Civics. E studies with only one friend. The one who likes history does not study in 5 th or 6th standard. E does not like languages. C does not like English, Hindi or Civics. 43. Which combination represents E’s favourite subject and the st andard in which he studies? a) Civic s and 7 th b) Economics and 5 th c) Civics and 6th th d) History and 7 e) Economics and 7th 44.

Which of the following is I’s favourite subject? a) History b) Civics c) Marathi d) Either English or Marathi e) Either English or Hindi

45.

Who amongst the following studeis in the 7 th standard? a) G b) C c) E d) D e) None of these 11

REASONING MADE EASY


46.

Which of the following combinations is definitely correct? a) I and Hindi b) G and English c) C and Marathi d) B and Hindi e) E and Economics

47.

Which of the following subjects does G like? a) Either Maths or Marathi b) Either Hindi or English c) Either Hindi or Civics d) Either Hindi or Marathi e) Either Civics or Economics

Directions (Q. 48-50) Read the following information carefully and answer the given questions. Despite repeated announcements that mobile phones were not allowed in the examination hall, three stuidents were caught with their mobile phones. A. Mobile phones nowadays have a lot of features and it is easy to cheat with their help. B. The invigilator must immediately confiscate the mobile phones and ask the students to leave the exam hall immediately. C. Mobile phones are very expensive and leaving them in bags outside the exam hall is not safe. D. There have been incidents where students who left the exam hall early stole the mobile phones kept in the bags of the students who were writing the exam. E. The school authorities must ask the students to leave their phones in the custody of the invigilator before the exam in order to avoid thefts of mobile phones. F. None of the other students were carrying their phones in the exam hall. 48.

Which of the following among A, B, C, and D may be a strong arguments in favour of the three s tudents who were caught with the mobile phone? a) Only A b) A and B c) C and D d) Only C e) B and D

49.

Which of the following among A, B, E and F may be the reason behind the school making such announcements before the exam? a) Only B b) D and E c) Only F d) Only A e) None of these

50.

Which of the following among A, B, D and F can be an immediate course of action for the invigilator? a) Only B b) A and D c) Only A d) D and F e) Only F 12

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 51-55) In these questions, a relationship between different elements is shown in the statements. The statements are followed by two conclusions. Give answer a) b) c) d) e)

If only conclusion I is true. If only conclusion II is true. If either conclusion I or II is true. If neither conclusion I nor II is true. If both conclusions I and II are true.

(51-52): Statement:

W >H =I>C =L
51.

Conclusions:

I. W > L

II. E > H

52.

Conclusions:

I. E < W

II. I > L

53.

Statement: Conclusions:

54.

Statement: Conclusions:

55.

P=R>ET

I. P > T

II. N > R C > B > L, Q = E > P = C

I. Q > B

II. L < E

Statement:

DP>R

Conclusions:

I. D = K

II. K > D

Directions (Q. 56-60) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions: A man has six sons U, V, W, X, Y and Z, who stay in four metro cities. They work in different companies, viz Infosys, Tech Mahindra, Tata, Nike, Walmart and Titan but not necessarily in the same order. Z stays in Mumbai and works with Nike. Those who stay in Kilkata work with Tech Mahindra and Walmart. One of the two Mumbaikars works with Titan. The one who works with Infosys lives in Chennai. Z does not live in Chennai. U works with Tata. V works with Tech Mahindra. Y works with Walmart. 56.

Who amoing the following works with Infosys? a) U b) W c) X d) Y e) None of these

57.

Which of the following pairs lives in Kolkata? 13

REASONING MADE EASY

a) XY d) WU 58.

59.

60.

b) ZX e) None of these


c) VY

Z works with which of the following companies? a) Walmart b) Titan d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

c) Tata

In which of the following metros does W live? a) Delhi b) Chennai d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

c) Kolkata

Which of the following combinations is true? a) V – Mumbai – Walmart b) Z – Kolkata – Walmart c) Y – Delhi – Titan d) W – Chennai- Infosys e) None of these

Directions (Q. 61-65) Study the following information carefully and give the answers. Sixteen teams have been invited to participate in the ABC Gold Cup cricket tournament. The tournament is conducted in two stages. In the first stage, the teams are divided in to two groups. Each group consists of eight teams, with each team playing every other team in its group exactly once. At the end of the first stage, the top four teams from each group advance to the second stage while the rest are eliminated. The second stage comprises of several rounds. A round involves one match for each team. The winner of a match in a round advances to the next round; while the loser is eliminated the team that remains undefeated in the second stage is declared the winner and claims the gold cup. The tournament rules are such that each match results in a winner and a loser with no possibility of a tie. In the first stage, a team earns one point for each win and no points for a loss. At the end of the first stage, teams in each group are ranked on the basis of total points to determine the qualifiers advancing to the next stage. Ties are resolved by a series of complex tie- breaking rules so that exactly four teams from each group advance to the next stage. 61.

What is the total number of matches played in the tournament? a) 28 b) 55 c) 63 d) 35 e) None of these

62.

The minimum number of wins needed for a team in the first stage to guarantee its advancement to the next stage is: a) 5 b) 6 c) 7 d) 4 e) None of these 14

REASONING MADE EASY


63.

What is the highest number of wins for a team in the first stage in spite of which it would be eliminated at the end of first stage? a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4 e) None of these

64.

What is the number of rounds in the second stage of tournament? a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4 e) None of these

65.

Which of the following statements is true? a) The winner will have more wins than any other team in the tournament. b) At the end of the first stage, no team eliminated from the tournament will have more wins than any of the team qualifying for the second stage. c) It is possible that the winner will have the same number of wins in the entire tournament as a team eliminated at the end of the first stage. d) The number of tems with exactly one win in the second stage of the tournament is 4. e) None of these

Directions (Q. 66-70) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. Five friends P, Q, R, S and T are Musician, Architect, Doctor, Engineer and Artist by profssion and like White, Blue, Red, Yellow and Green colour but not necessarily in that order. •

•

• • • • •

•

•

66.

The person whose hobby is dancing preferred lemonade to cola while others preferred cola to lemonade in beverages. The four friends who took cola were P, the one who is an Engineer, the person whose favourite colour is Green and t he o ne whose hobby is net surfing. S did not take lemonade and his favourite colour is White. Q’s favourite colour is Blue. He did not like lemonade. T’s hobby is not pai nting, reading or gardening. S clicks a picture of his friend who is an Engineer. The person whose favourite colour is Red likes painting and the person who is artist like gardening. S is not a doctor. The person who is a doctor takes cola. The person who is an Engineer likes Blue colour. The musician’s favourite colour is not yellow. R’s favourite colour is Green. Who among the following is a Doctor? a) R b) P d) Can’t say e) None of these

c) S

15

REASONING MADE EASY

67.

68.

69.

70.

Q’s hobby is a) Reading d) Can’t say

b) Painting e) None of these


c) Gardening

The person who likes Blue colour is a/an a) Architect b) Musician d) Can’t say e) None of these

c) Engineer

Whose favourite colour is Yellow? a) T b) R d) Can’t say e) None of these

c) The one who is an artist

Which of the following combinations is not correctly matched? a) T-Architect-Yellow-Dancing-Cola b) R-Artist-Green-Gardening-Cola c) Q-Engineer-Blue-Reading-Cola d) P-Doctor-Red-Painting-Cola e) None of these

Directions (Q. 71-73) Read the given information carefully and answer the questioins that follow. Independence Day is considered as a day of rejoicing. Thousands of heroes of independence struggle made the supreme sacrifice of their lives so that we can enjoy freedom. But see how we have misused the hard won freedom over the last 67 years – exactly in the same way the racist representatives of the British, Winston Churchill, predicted before India wrested independence from the British. Independence Day and Republic Day do not kindle patriotic fervour in a large section of our society any longer. They have only been non-working days where people sit back at h ome and enjoy with their families. They produce only total revulsion for our corrupt political class, self-serving bureaucracy, greedy business empires and the completely undisciplined people. The gullible people of the country have been taken for a ride by the promises made by their leaders all these years while they have been bleeding the nation white in scam after scam. To millions of patriotic Indians Independence Day will remain a sad day until all these parasites are totally annihilated. I. II. III. IV. 71.

Communal harmony will be disturbed in the country. Caste system will be promoted. Terrorism activities will increase in the country. The economy of the country will be affected.

Which of the following assumptions is implicit in the above passage? a) People of India lack in nationalism 16

REASONING MADE EASY


b) Increasing corruption in India has ended the patriotic feelings among the Indians c) Bureaucracy is the hurdle in national integrity d) The freedom movement of India was not public; it was confined to only a few individuals. e) None of these 72.

Which of the following will be the effect of lack of patriotism in India? a) Only I b) Only I and II c) Only III d) Only III and IV e) Only I, II and IV

73.

Which of the following statements are in line with the above passage? a) The independence of India was very hard-earned. b) People of India are not respecting the hard-earned freedom of India. c) Increasing corrcuption in India is c reating anger among the people. d) Independence day is just like a public holiday where people sit at home and enjoy e) All of these

Directions (Q. 74-78) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions. Six friends P, Q, R, S, T and U from six different areas, viz. Rohini, Indirapuram, Dwarka, Kaushambi, Munirka and Vaishali, go for shopping in six different shopping complexes, viz. Sahara, GIP, CSM, V3S, Shipra and Select Citywalk, but not necessarily in the same order. Three different types of transports are used by them, viz. Car, Bus and Metro, in such a manner that two persons use the same type of transport but not necessarily in the same order. •

•

• • • • •

• •

•

P uses car and lives in Vaishali but he does not go to CSM and Select Citywalk. The person going to Shipra Complex uses car and the one going to GIP uses bus. T uses the same type of transport as the person from Dwarka. CSM Complex is chosen by the person who uses bus. R is neither from Rohini nor from Munirka and he goes to Shipra Complex. One of the persons who use Metro goes to Sahara Complex. Q is from Kaushambi and goes to GIP. He does not use the same transport as S. U is neither from Indirapuram nor from Munirka. Select Citywalk and GIP Complex are not visited by the persons who use car. The persons from Kaushambi and Rohini are using the same type of transport. 17

REASONING MADE EASY

74.

75.

76.

77.

78.


Who are using Metro? a) S and T b) U and S d) P and U e) None of these

c) T and P

Who is going to V, S Complex for shopping? a) U b) P d) S e) None of these

c) R

Who is using the same transport as U? a) P b) Q d) R e) None of these

c) T

S belongs to which of the following places? a) Indirapuram b) Vaishali d) Dwarka e) None of these

c) Munirka

R is using which of the following transports? a) Car b) Bus d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) Metro

Directions (Q. 79-83) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions: T, U, V, W, X, Y and Z seven persons belong to seven different families, viz. Punjabi, Rajasthani, Gujarati, Marathi, Bengali, Kannada and Malayali, but not necessarily in the same order. All of them are travelling in a train in AC tier II. They occupy two lower berths, three middle berths and two upper berths. V is a Punjabi and is not on the upper berths. The Gujarati is the only other person who occupies the same type of berth as V. U and Y are not on the middle berths and they are Malayali and Bengali respectively. T is a Marathi. Z is neithr a Kannada nor a Gujarati. X occupies the same type of b erth as the Rajasthani. 79.

Z belongs to which of the following families? a) Rajasthani b) Kannada d) Bengali e) None of these

c) Gujarati

80.

Which of the following pairs occupy the lower berth? a) U, V b) Y, U c) W, V d) T, V e) None of these

81.

Who belongs to the Gujarati family? a) Y b) W d) Z e) None of these

82.

c) X

Which of the following combinations is true? a) W-Gujarati-Upper 18

REASONING MADE EASY


b) Y-Bengali-Lower c) X-Kannada-Lower d) Z- Rajasthani-Middle e) None of these 83.

Which of the following groups occupies the middle berths? a) Z, Y, U b) Z, X, V c) X, T, Z d) W, T, X e) None of these

Directions (Q. 84-88) Study the given information carefully and answer the given questions. Seven plays – A, B, C, D, E, F and G are to be held on seven consecutive days (starting on Monday and ending on Sunday) not necessarily in the same order. Only one play can be held on one day. Only two plays will be held after play G. Only three plays will be held between play B and play E. Play B will not be held on Sunday. Play A will be held before play D and play C (not necessarily immediately before). Play C will be held after play D (not necessarily immediate after) 84.

Play D will be held on which day? a) Monday b) Tuesday d) Thursday e) Saturday

c) Wednesday

85.

Which play will be held immediately after Play C? a) Play E b) Play F c) Play B d) Play G e) None of these

86.

Which play will be held on Monday? a) Play F b) Play B d) Play D e) Play A

c) Play E

87.

If all seven plays are held in the alphabetical order of their names starting on Monday and ending on Sunday, the positions of how many will remain unchanged as compared to the original schedule? a) Three b) More than three c) One d) None e) Two

88.

Play F is related to Monday in a certain way based on the given schedule. Similarly, Play G is related to Thursday. In the same way, Play B is related to which of the following days? a) Wednesday b) Friday c) Tuesday d) Saturday e) Sunday

19

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 89-93) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions given below it. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) 89.

There are eight books Mathematics, Sanskrit, English, Physics, History, Geography, Hindi and Biology. (Not necessarily in the same order). Geography’s book is fourth from the bottom and Sanskrit’s book is third from the top. There are three books between the books of English and Biology. Hind i book is at exact between the books of History and Biology. The book of Physics is at just below the book of Mathematics. Which book is at top? a) Mathematics d) Cannot find

b) Physics e) None of these

c) Biology

90.

How many books are taken between the books of History and English? a) Two b) Three c) Four d) Cannot find e) None of these

91.

The book of Physics is placed between a) Biology-Mathematics b) Geography-Biology c) Mathematics-Sanskrit d) Sanskrit-Biology

92.

Which of the following book is placed at bottom? a) Physics b) Biology c) Hindi d) Cannot find e) None of these

93.

What is the position of the book of History from the top? a) Fifth b) Fourth c) Sixth d) Seventh e) None of these

Directions (Q. 94-96) On the basis of the following information, answer the questions given below. (i)

(ii) (iii) (iv) 94.

Five persons lived in five houses out of six houses P, Q, R, S, T and U. All houses are in series from North to South. Main gate of each house was facing west. From North, Dhirendra’s house is the third from Sanjay’s house In North, Manoj’s house is at as much distance from Vijay’s house as in South, Sanjay’s house is at from Dhirendra’s house. In South, Kunal’s house is just aftre Vinay’s house. Which of the following lived at last in South? a) Kunal b) Vinay

c) Dhirendra 20

REASONING MADE EASY

d) Sanjay 95.

96.


e) None of these

Which house was empty? a) P b) Q d) S or T e) None of these

c) R

Which of the following statement was not necessary? a) IV b) III c) II d) I e) None of these

Directions (Q. 97-101) these questions are based on the following information. Study it carefully to answer the questions. Seven officers L, M, N, P, Q, R and S work in three different shifts I, II and III with atleast two persons working I n each shift. Each one of them has a different weekly off from Monday to Sunday not necessarily in the same order. M works in second shift only with R whose weekly off is on Friday. Q’s weekly off is on the next day of L’s weekly off and both of them work I n different shifts. P works in third shift and his weekly off is on Saturday. S has a weekly off on Monday and he works in first shift. The one who has a weekly off on Sunday works in first shift. L and P do not work in the same shift; L’s weekly off is on Tuesday.

97.

Whose weekly off falls on Thursday? a) L b) N d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

c) Q

98.

Which of the following combinations of shift, person and weekly off is definitely correct? a) II, M, Sunday b) III, N, Sunday c) II, P, Sunday d) I, L, Tuesday e) None of these

99.

Whose weekly off is on Sunday? a) L b) M d) Q e) None of these

100.

101.

c) N

On which day is Q’s weekly off? a) Tuesday b) Wednesday d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

c) Thursday

Which of the following group of officers work in shift I? a) L, N, S b) L, S c) N, S d) L, P, Q e) None of these

21

REASONING MADE EASY

102.


In a certain code PARTICLE is written as USBQFMDJ, how is DOCUMENT written in that code? a) VDEPUONF b) VDPENFUQ c) VDPENFOU d) VDPEUOFN e) None of these

Directions (Q. 103-107): In these questions letters are to be coded by the digits and symbols as per the scheme and conditions given below. In each question a group of letters is given followed by four combinations of digits/symbols numbered a, b, c and d. The serial number of the combination which correctly represents the letter group is your answer. If none of the combinations is correct your answer is e) i.e. None of these. Letters: Digit/Symbol Code:

KETJHIFALUBMORP 3 7% $4 *1 98 6# @2 5©

Conditions (i) If the first as well as the last letter is a vowel their codes are to be swapped. (ii) If the first as well as the last letter is a consonant b oth are to be coded by $. (iii) If the first letter is as vowel and the last letter is a consonant, t he vowel is to be coded by ^ and the consonant is to be added by --. 103.

104.

105.

106.

107.

TARIFM a) $95*1$ %95*1% d) @95*1@ AJTKLU a) 9$%386 ^$%38 — d) --$%38^ ORBETH a) – 5#7%^ 25#7%4 d) 45#7%2 KEOMPA --72@©^ 372@©9 d) 972@©3 IJLTPU a) *$8%©6 6$8%©6

b) %95*1@

c)

e) None of the above

b) $$%38$

c)

e) None of these

b) ^5 #7%--

c)


b) ^72@©--

c)


b) *$8%©*

c) 22

REASONING MADE EASY

d) 6$8%©*



Directions (Q. 108-112): Study the following information carefully to answer these questions. Seven friends F, H, J, K, L, M and P are working in different cities viz. Chennai, Mumbai, Bengaluru, Jaipur, Indore, Ahmedabad, and Hyderabad not necessarily in the same order. Each one of them has a different profession viz., C.A., Doctor, Professor, Engineer, Banker, Lawyer and Architect not necessarily in the same order. H is a Lawyer and he works in Jaipur. K is a Doctor and he does not work I n Chennai. The C.A. works in Mumbai. M works in Indore. Architect works in Hyderabad. L is a B anker and he works in Bengaluru. F is an Engineer. J does not work in Mumbai. 108.

Who is an architect? a) J d) L

b) P e) None of these

c) K

109.

Which of the following combinations of person, profession and city is definitely correct? a) F-Engineer-Bengaluru b) K-Architect-Hyderabad c) L-Banker-Mumbai d) M-Professor-Jaipur e) None of the above

110.

Who is working in Mumbai? a) J b) K d) P e) None of these

111.

112.

Engineer works in which city? a) Ahmedabad b) Chennai d) Bengaluru e) None of the above Who is a professor? a) P d) M or J

c) M

c) Mumbai

b) J e) None of these

c) M

113.

In a certain code, DOWN is written as 5139 and NEAR is written as 9486. How is RODE written in that code? a) 6514 b) 6154 c) 9154 d) 3154 e) None of these

114.

In a certain code ORGANISE is written as BHSPDRHM. How is DOUBTFUL written in that code? 23

REASONING MADE EASY

a) CVPEKTES d) ATNCMVGU

b) CVPIMVGU e) None of these


c) ATNCKTES

115.

If it is possible to make only one meaningful English word with the first, the se cond, the fourth and the tenth letters of the word M A J E S T I C A L, which of the following will be the second letter of that word? If no such word can be made, give X’ as the an swer and if mor e than one such word can be made, give Y  is the answer a) M b) E c) L d) X e) Y

116.

In a certain code language, pit ne’ means come here’, ne ta ja’ means come and go’ and ja sa re’ means you and me’. What does ta’ means in that code language? a) come b) and c) here d) go e) Cannot be determined

117.

RT’ is related to VX’ and BD’ is related to FH’, in the same way as KM’ is related to a) NP b) OR c) OQ d) PR e) None of these

118.

In a certain code GEAR is written as 5%9$’ and FIRM is written as 3@$7’. How is FAME written in that code? a) 397% b) 3%97 c) 597% d) 5397 e) None of these

Directions (Q. 119-122) In each of the questions below are given three statements followed by three conclusions numbered I, II and III. You have to take the given statements to be true even if they seem to be at variance from commonly known facts. Read all the conclusions and then decide which of the given conclusions logically follows from the given statements disregarding commonly known facts. 119.

Statements:

Some books are trees. All trees are roads. All roads are wheels.

Conclusions:

I. Some wheels are books. II. Some roads are books. III. Some wheels are trees.

a) Only I and II follow b) Only II and III follow c) Only I and III follow d) All I, II, III follow e) None of the above 24

REASONING MADE EASY

120.


Statements:

All stones are rivers. All rivers are cars. Some cars are trains.

Conclusions:

I. Some trains are stones II. Some cars are stones. III. Some trains are rivers.

a) None follows b) Only I follows c) Only II follows d) Only III follows e) Only II and III follow 121.

Statements:

All desks are rooms. Some rooms are halls. All halls are leaves.

Conclusions:

I. Some leaves are desks. II. Some halls are desks. III. Some leaves are rooms.

a) None follows b) Only I follows c) Only II follows d) Only III follows e) Only II and III follow 122.

Statements:

Some bags are plates. Some plates are chairs. All chairs are tables.

Conclusions:

I. Some tables are plates. II. Some chairs are bags. III. No chair is bag.

a) Only I follow b) Only II follows c) Only III follows d) Only II and III follow e) None of these

Directions (Q. 123-128) In the following questions, the symbols $, %, @, © and * are used with the following meaning as illustrated below. P % Q’ means P is not smaller than Q’. P $ Q’ means P is not greater than Q’. P * Q’ means P is neither greater than nor equal to Q’. 25

REASONING MADE EASY


P © Q’ means P is neither smaller than nor equal to Q’. P @ Q’ means P is neither greater than nor smaller than Q’.

123.

Statements: Conclusions:

R @ K, K $ F, F * N I. N © R II. F @ R III. F © R

a) Only I is true b) Only either II or III is true c) Only I and either II or III are true d) Only III is true e) None of the above 124.


J © M, M * K, K % D I. J © D II. D * M III. K © J

a) None is true b) Only I is true c) Only II is true d) Only III is true e) Only I and II are t rue 125.


H * T, T $ B, B © R I. R © H II. B © H III. T * R

a) Only I is true b) Only I and II are true c) Only I and III are true d) Only II and III are true e) None of the above 126.


R $ D, D @ N, N © F I. F * D II. F * R III. N % R

a) Only I and II are true b) Only I and III are true c) Only II and III are true d) All are true e) None of the above 127.


F $ B, B @ H, H % K I. B % F II. K @ F 26

REASONING MADE EASY


III. K $ B a) Only I is true b) Only II is true c) Only III is true d) Only I and III are true e) None of these 128.


M % D, D * K, K $ N I. K © M II. N © D III. M © N

a) Only I is true b) Only II is true c) Only III is true d) Only I and II are true e) None of these

Directions (Q. 129-133) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. P, Q, R, S, T, V and W are seven students of a college. Each of them has a favourite subject from Physics, Chemistry, English, Biology, History, Geography and Philosopy, not necessarily in the same order. Each of them also has a favourite sport from Football, Cricket, Hockey, Volleyball, Badminton, Table Tennis and Basketball, not necessarily in the same order. R likes Philospy and his favourite sport is Hockey. The one who likes Football likes English. T’s favourite sport is not badminton or Table Tennis. V does not like either History or Bilogy. The one whose favourite sport is Basketball does not like Physics. W likes Chemistry and his favourite sport is Volleball. S likes Geography. Q’s favourite sport is Badminton. V does not like English and his favourite sport is not Basketball. P’s favourite sport is Cricket. The one whose favourite sport is Badminton does not like Biology. 129.

130.

131.

Who likes History? a) P d) V

b) R e) Data inadequate

c) Q

Whose favourite sport is Basketball? a) S b) W d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) Q

Which subject does T like? a) Biology b) Physics d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) Chemistry

27

REASONING MADE EASY

132.

133.


What is Q’s favourite sport? a) Cricket b) Table Tennis d) Badminton e) None of these

c) Football

Which subject does P like? a) History b) Biology d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) Chemistry

134.

Mustard’ is related to seed’ in the same way as Carrot’ is related to a) Fruit b) Stem c) Flower d) Root e) None of these

135.

How many meaningful English words can be formed made with the letters ESTR using each letter only once in each word? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

136.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) Cup b) Jug c) Tumbler d) Plate e) Pitcher

137.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) Copper b) Mercury c) Iron d) Aluminium e) Zinc

138.

FI’ is related to LO’ in the same way as PS’ in related to a) VY b) VZ c) WZ d) UX e) None of these

139.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) 217 b) 143 c) 241 d) 157 e) 181

140.

Gram’ is related to Mass’ in the same way as Centimetre’ is related to a) Area b) Volume c) Length d) Sound e) Energy

141.


28

REASONING MADE EASY


142.

If white’ means black’, black’ means red’, red’ means blue’. blue’ means yellow’ and yellow’ means grey’ then which of the following represents the colour of clear sky? a) Blue b) Red c) Yellow d) Can’t be determined e) None of these

143.

In a certain code, MODEL is written as 513#2’ and DEAR is written as 3#%8’. How is LOAD written in that code? a) 21%3 b) 23%1 c) 25%3 d) 21#3 e) None of these

Directions (Q. 144-148) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. P, Q, R, S, T and M are six students of a school, one each studies in Class IVI. Each of them has a favourite colour from red, black, blue, yellow, pink and green, not necessarily in the same order. Q likes black and does not study in Class IV or V. The one who studies in Class IV does not like green. P studies in Class II. M likes blue and does not study in Class IV. The one who likes yellow studies in Class VI. S likes pink and studies in Class I. R do not study in Class VI. 144.

145.

146.

In which class does R study? a) V d) Data inadequate

b) III e) None of these

c) IV

Which colour does R like? a) Black d) Blue

b) Yellow e) None of these

c) Green

Which colour does P like? a) Green d) Data inadequate

b) Yellow e) None of these

c) Red

147.

Which of the following combinations is correct? a) P-II-Yellow b) Q-III-Green c) S-I-Black d) T-V-Yellow e) None of these

148.

In which class does M study? a) IV b) III d) V e) None of these

149.

c) II

How many meaningful English words can be formed with the letters MASTE using each letter only once in each word? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three 29

REASONING MADE EASY

150.



Directions (Q. 151-155) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. P, Q, R, S, T, V and W are seven students of a school. Each of them studies in different standard from standard IV to standard X not necessarily in the same order. Each of them has favourite subject from English, Science, History, Geography, Mathematics, Hindi and Sanskrit not necessarily in the same order. Q studies in VII standard and does not like either Mathematics or Geography. R likes English and does not study either in V or in IX. T studies in VIII standard and likes Hindi. One who likes Science studies in X standard? S studies in IV standard. W likes Sanskrit. P does not study In X standard. One who likes Geography studies in V standard. 151.

152.

153.

154.

155.

In which standard does W study? a) VII b) IX d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) X

Which subject does P like? a) Geography b) Mathematics d) History e) None of these

c) English

Which subject does S like? a) History b) Geography d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) Mathematics

In which standard does P study? a) IV b) VII d) X e) None of these

c) IX

Which of the following combination of student standard subject is correct? a) T-VIII-Mathematics b) W-VII-Sanskrit c) Q-VII-Geography d) V-X-Science e) None of these

Directions (Q. 156-160) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below 30

REASONING MADE EASY

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi)


A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H are 8 students each having a different height. D is shorter than A but taller than G. E is taller than H but shorter than C. B is shorter than D but taller than F. C is shorter than G. G is not as tall as F.

156.

Which of the following is definitely false? a) G is shorter than F b) C is shorter than F c) F is taller than C d) B is taller than E e) All are true

157.

If another student J who is taller than E but shorter than G is added to the group. Which of the following will be definitely true? a) C and J are of same height b) G is shorter than D c) G is shorter than H d) G is taller than A e) None of the above

158.

Which of the following will definitely be the third from top when 8 students are arranged in descending order of height? a) B b) F c) G d) B or G e) Cannot be determined

159.

How many of them are definitely shorter than F? a) Three b) Four c) Five d) Data inadequate e) None of these

160.

Which of the following is redundant to answer all the above questions? a) (ii) only b) (ii) and (iii) only c) (iii) and (iv) only d) (ii) and (v) only e) All are necessary to answer the above questions

161.

A, B, C, D and E are five students in a class. D did not enter along with A or E but entered before C. B did not enter before C but entered along with A. E was n ot t h e last to enter. Which of the following I s definitely true? a) C entered the class only after D b) D entered the class only after E c) B entered the class after A d) A entered the class after D e) None of the above 31

REASONING MADE EASY


162.

Among A, B, C, D and E, each having a different weight, D is not lighter than B and E is not heavier than A. C is not the heaviest. Who among them is the lightest? a) D b) B c) E d) Data inadequate e) None of these

163.

Each consonant in the word BISCUIT is replaced by the next letter in the English alphabet and each vowel is replaced by the previous letter in the English alphabet and the letters so obtained are rearranged in alphabetical order, which of the following will be the 3 rd from the left end after the rearrangement? a) C b) D c) H d) T e) None of these

164.

In a certain code DONE is written as 5139’ and SEAL is written as 8942’. How is LOAD written in that code? a) 2415 b) 2145 c) 2945 d) 2182 e) None of these

165.


166.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) Gold b) Nickel c) Platinum d) Tungsten e) Diamond

167.

Among P, Q, T, A and B each having a different h eight, T is taller than P and B but shorter than A and Q. P is not the shortest. Who among them is the tallest? a) A b) Q c) P d) P or B e) Data inadequate

168.

How many meaningful English words can b e made with the letter RBAE using each letter only once in each word? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

169.

What should come next in the following letter series? HGFEDCBAGFEDCBAGFEDCB a) E b) G c) F d) B e) None of these 32

REASONING MADE EASY


170.

Mohan correctly remembers that his father’s birthday is before 20th January but after 16th January whereas his sister correctly remembers that their father’s birthday is after 18 th January but before 23rd January. On which date in January is definitely their father’s birthday? a) 18th b) 19th c) 20th d) Data inadequate e) None of these

171.

If P’ denotes ×’, R’ denotes +’, M’ denotes  ⎯’ and W’ denotes +’ then 20 R 5 W 12 M 3 P 4 =? a) 4 b) 16 c) 28 d) 52 e) None of these

172.

If the positions of 2nd and 3rd digits within each number are interchanged, which of the following will be the sum of the first and 2 nd digits of the 3 rd highest number? a) 16 b) 10 c) 9 d) 15 e) None of these

173.

Which of the following are the sum of the first and the third digits of the second lowest number? a) 16 b) 10 c) 18 d) 5 e) None of these

174.

If the positions of the first and the second digits within each number are interchanged, which of the following will be the difference between the highest and the second highest number? a) 203 b) 133 c) 385 d) 182 e) 144

175.

If the positions of the first and the third digits within each number are interchanged, which of the following will be the sum of the second and third digits of the lowest number? a) 8 b) 11 c) 15 d) 12 e) None of these

Directions (Q. 176-178) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below There are six employees – A, B, C, D, E and F in a company. A is more experienced than two employees. D has more experience than employee C. D has less experience than employee F. E has less experience than D. E does not have the least experience. F is not the most experienced employee. The employee who is 2 nd most experienced has an experience of 13 years. The employee who is second least experienced has an experience of five years. 33

REASONING MADE EASY


176.

Who among the following may have an experience of 10 years? a) E b) D c) A d) Either A or D e) F

177.

Who among the following is less experinced than only B? a) F b) C c) D d) A e) E

178.

Who among the following is more experienced than only C? a) A b) D c) E d) F e) Cannot be determined

Directions (Q. 179-183) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below Seven persons – A, B, C, D, E, F and G – bought different watches viz., Rado, Omni, Fas Track, Seiko, Casio, Tissot and Titan on different days of the same week from Monday to Sunday, but not necessarily in the same order. The watch of Omni Company was bought on Friday. F bought Titan watch on Tuesday. Onle one watch was bought between the watches Omni and Rado. B bought Tissot watch immediately after the person who bought Casio watch. Seiko watch was not bought after the Tissot watch. G bought watch immediately after B but before C and D. A does not buy the watch of Casio company. D does not buy the watch of Rado Company. 179.

Who among the following bought Seiko watch? a) D b) C c) E d) A e) None of these

180.

On which of the following days of the week D bought a watch? a) Saturday b) Sunday c) Thursday d) Friday e) None of these

181.

Who among the following did buy Casio watch? a) G b) E c) D d) C e) None of these

182.

Who among the following did buy Omni watch on Friday? a) C b) D c) G d) E e) None of these

183.

Which of the following combinations of Day-Person-Watch is correct? a) Friday-A-Fast Track b) Monday-E-Omni c) Wednesday-B-Casio d) Saturday-C-Tissot 34

REASONING MADE EASY


e) Sunday-C-Rado 184.

Present ages of father and son are in the ratio of 5:1 respectively. Seven years later this ratio becomes 3:1. What is the son’s present age in years? a) 8 b) 7 c) 6 d) 5 e) None of these

185.

From the given alternative words, select the word which can be formed using the letters of the given word: TRADITIONAL a) NATION b) RADIO c) ANIMAL d) DIRTY e) None of these

186.

A shepherd had 17 sheep. All but nine died. How many sheep are left? a) 9 b) 8 c) 7 d) 10 e) None of these

187.

Select the missing number from the given responses. 1 4 2 3 2 ? a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5 e) None of these

188.

Town A and Town B were 600 km. apart. Joshua left town A for town B and travelled at an average speed of 65 km/h. At the same time, Menon left town B for town A. The two of them met 5 hours later. Find Menon’s average speed. a) 55 km/h b) 60 km/h c) 65 km/h d) 120 km/h e) None of these

189.

In a certain code ALIVE is written as WFHBM. How is VALUE written in that code? a) VFMWB b) VFKWB c) WBAVF d) WBKVF e) None of these

190.

The letters in the word DANGEROUS are changed in such a way that the consonants a rereplaced by the previous letter in the English alphabet and the vowels are replaced by the next letter in the English alphabet. Which of rd the following will be the 3 letter from the left end of the new set of letters? a) B b) M c) O d) L e) None of these

Directions (Q. 191-195) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H are eight persons working in three different departments viz. Operations, Sales and Finance of an organisation with at least two 35

REASONING MADE EASY


and not more three in any department. They are in three different scales viz. I, II and III with at least two in any one scale. Both the employees in Operations departments are in Scale II. D works in Sales department and belongs to Scale I. A works in Finance departments and does not belong to Scale I. Two employees in Sales departments belong to one scale. F works with only H in one of the departments. C works with E in one of the departments. B does not work with either C or A in the same department. G does not belong to Scale III. E does not belong to Scale I. 191.

Which of the following combinatins is correct? a) Operation-F-I b) Operation-H-III c) Sales-B-II d) Finance-E-III e) All are correct

192.

Which of the following groups of employees work in sales department? a) DBE b) DBC c) DBG d) Data inadequate e) None of these

193.

H belongs to which scale? a) I b) II d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) III

G belongs to which scale? a) II b) III d) I or II e) None of these

c) I

C belongs to which scale? a) I b) II d) I or II e) None of these

c) III

194.

195.

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Option A Option C Option E Option C Option A Option A Option B Option E Option B Option C Option D 36

REASONING MADE EASY

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57.


Option A Option D Option C Option C Option C Option D Option A Option A Option C Option B Option D Option A Option E Option E Option D Option C Option C Option B Option C Option A Option D Option A Option B Option C Option B Option A Option E Option C Option B Option E Option A Option C Option A Option A Option C Option B Option C Option D Option A Option A Option B Option D Option E Option C Option B Option C 37

REASONING MADE EASY

58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. 97. 98. 99. 10. 101. 102. 103.


Option B Option B Option D Option C Option A Option A Option C Option C Option B Option A Option C Option A Option A Option B Option D Option E Option A Option B Option B Option D Option A Option A Option C Option B Option D Option C Option D Option A Option E Option E Option C Option A Option E Option C Option B Option C Option A Option C Option C Option E Option D Option C Option B Option A Option D Option A 38

REASONING MADE EASY

104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116. 117. 118. 119.

Option E Option B Option C Option D Option A Option E Option D Option B Option C Option B Option A Option E Option D Option C Option A Optoin D

120.

Option C


39

REASONING MADE EASY

121.

122.


Option D

Option E

40

REASONING MADE EASY

123.


Option C R= K, K ≤ F, F < N R=K≤F R, F > R, F = R So, either II or III and I are true.

124.

Option A J > M, M < K, K ≥ D J > M < K ≥D The relations cannot made between J and D, D and M and K and J. So none is true.

125.

Option E H < T, T ≤ B, B > R H < T ≤ B > R or B > H Only II is true.

126.

Option B R ≤ D, D = N, N > F R≤D=N>F F < D and N ≥ R Only I and III are true.

127.

Option A F ≤ B, B = H, H ≥ K F ≤ B = H ≥ K 41

REASONING MADE EASY


Only I is true. 128.

Option B M ≥ D, D < K, K ≤ N M≥D
Student Sports

P Cricket

Subject

Bilogy

129. 130. 131. 132. 133.

Option D Option A Option E Option D Option B

134.

Option D

Q Badmint on History

R Hocke y Philos ophy

S Basket ball Geogra phy

T Footbal l English

V Table Tennis Physic s

W Volleyba ll Chemistr y

As mustard’ is related to seed’ in the same way carrot’ is related to root’.

135.

Option B Meaningful word is REST.

136.

Option D Plate’ is normally used for solid matters.

137.

Option B Except mercury’ all are available in solid form at general or normal temperature.

138.

Option A As, F + 6 L I+ 6 O

139.

Similarly P + 6 V S + 6 Y

Option A

42

REASONING MADE EASY


140.

Option C As gram’ is related to mass’ in the same way ‘ centimetre’ is related to length’.

141.

Option B 28 is divisible by 7.

142.

Option C Colour of clear sky is blue and according to question, blue means yellow so the colour of clear sky will be yellow’.

143.

Option A M O 5 1

D 3

E #

D 3

E #

A %

R 8

L 2

O 1

A %

D 3

Student P Q R S T M

Class II III IV I VI V

L 2

Favaourite colour Green Black Red Pink Yellow Blue

144. 145. 146. 147. 148.

Option C Option E Option A Option E Option D

149.

Option E Meaningful words = MATES, STEAM, TAMES and TEAMS

150.

Option A Except 78, if subtract 1 all other give a prime number.

Student P

Class V

Favourite Subject Geography 43

REASONING MADE EASY

Q R S T V W

VII VI IV VIII X IX

151. 152. 153. 154. 155.


History English Mathematics Hindi Science Sanskrit

Option B Option A Option C Option E Option D

(i) There are 8 students A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H (ii) A >D> G (iii) C > E> H (iv) D > B > F (v) G> C (vi) F> G From all statements. A>D>B>F>G>C>E>H 156.

Option E All are true.

157.

Option B A>D > B > F>G >C >E >H

158.

Option A A >D > B >F > G >C > E >H

159.

Option B G, C, E and H is smaller than F.

160.

Option E All statements are necessary.

161. 162.

Option D Option D

163.

Option C B I S C According to question, C H T D

U

I

T

T

H

U 44

REASONING MADE EASY

According to alphabet, C D H H rd So, H is 3 from left. 164.

Option B D O 5 1

N 3

E 9

S 8

E 9

A 4

L 2

So,

L 2

O 1

A 4

D 5

165.

Option A

T

T


U

Apart from 215 all are divisible by 13. 143 = 13 × 11; 247 = 13 × 19; 91 = 13 × 7; 65 = 13 × 5 215 = 5 × 43 166. 167. 168.

Option E Option E Option C Meaningful words are BEAR, BARE

169.

Option C HGFEDCBA, GFEDCBA, GFEDCB, FEDCB Next letter series = F

170.

Option B th According to Mohan, birthday may be 17, 18 or 19 January. According to Mohan’s sister, birthday may be at 19, 20, 21 o r 22th Jan. So common day = 19 Jan.

171.

Option A

172.

20 R 5 W 12 M 3 P 4 = ? ? = 20 ÷ 5 + 12 ⎯ 3 × 4 ? = 4 + 12 ⎯ 12 = 4 Option A 832 ⟶ 823 719 ⟶ 791 654 ⟶ 645 967 ⟶ 976 45

REASONING MADE EASY


481 ⟶ 418 3rd largest number is 791 and the sum of their first and second digit = 7 + 9 = 16 173.

Option B Second smallest number is 654. So, the sum of the first and the third digit is 6 + 4 = 10

174.

Option E After interchanging first and second digit of number. 832 ⟶ 382 719 ⟶ 179 654 ⟶ 564 967 ⟶ 697 481 ⟶ 841 Highest number = 841 Second highest number = 697 Difference between them = 841 ⎯ 697 = 144

175.

Option D Interchanging the first and third digit of number 832 ⟶ 238 719 ⟶ 917 654 ⟶ 456 967 ⟶ 769 481 ⟶ 184 Smallest number = 184 So, the sum of second and third digit = 8 + 4 = 12

176.

Option D F is not the most experienced. So, B is the most experienced. Now, B > F > D > A > E > C

177.

Option A F has less experience than only B.

178.

Option C E is more experienced than only C.

Day Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

Person A F E B G

Watch Seiko Titan Casio Tissot Omni 46

REASONING MADE EASY

Saturday Sunday

D C


Fast Track Rado

179.

Option D A bought Seiko watch on Monday.

180.

Option A D bought Fast Track watch on Saturday.

181.

Option B E bought Casio watch on Wednesday.

182.

Option C G bought Omni watch on Friday.

183.

Option E The combination Sunday-C-Rado is correct.

184.

Option B Suppose the present age of son be x years Therefore, the present age o f father would b e 5x years According to question, 5x + 7 / x + 7 = 3/1 5x + 7 = 3x + 21 5x ⎯ 3x = 21 ⎯ 7 2x = 14 X=7

185.

Option B There is only one N’ in the given word. Therefore, the word NATION cannot be formed. There is no M’ letter in the given word. Therefore, the word ANIMAL cannot be formed. There is no Y’ letter in the given word. Therefore, the word DIRTY cannot be formed.

186.

Option A There are 17 sheep. All but nine died. It means 9 sheep are left.

187.

Option D 1+3=4 4 ⎯2 = 2 2+1=3 3 ⎯1 = 2 2+3=5

188.

Option A 47

REASONING MADE EASY


Joshua covered a distance of 65 × 5 = 325 km. in 5 hours Menon has to cover a distance of (600 ⎯ 325) = 275 km. in 5 hours Speed of Menon = 275/5 = 55 kmph 189. 190.

Option B Option B

Person A B C D E F G H

191.

Department Finance Sales Finance Sales Finance Operations Sales Operations

Scale III III III I III II I II

Option D The combination Finance-E-III is correct.

192.

Option C B, D and G work in Sales department.

193.

Option B H belongs to scale II

194.

Option C G belongs to Scale I

195.

Option C C belongs to scale III

48

REASONING MADE EASY


49

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter-2 Input-Output Directions (Q. 1-5) A word can and number arrangement machine when given an input line of words and numbers rearranges them following a particular rule in each step. The following is an illustration of input and rearrangement. Input : go now 52 38 17 for again 65 Step I: 65 go now 52 38 17 for again Step II: 65 again go now 52 38 17 for Step III: 65 again 52 go now 38 17 for Step IV: 65 again 52 for go now 38 17 Step V: 65 again 52 for 38 go now 17 Step VI: 65 again 52 for 38 go 17 now Step VI is the last step of the rearrangement. As per the rules followed in the above steps, find out in each of the following questions the appropriate step for the given input.

Input: show 51 36 new far 81 46 goal 1.

Which of the following steps will be the last but one? a) VII b) VIII c) VI d) V e) None of these

Input: home turf 39 24 86 44 roll over 2. Which of the following steps will be the last? a) X b) IX d) VII e) None of these

c) VIII

Step II of an input is: 76 ask 12 32 begin over join 42. 3.

How many more steps will be required to complete the rearrangement? a) Four b) Five c) Six d) Three e) None of these

Step IV of an input is: 58 box 47 dew 15 21 town pot. 4. Which of the following steps will be the last? a) VII b) VI d) IX e) None of these

c) VIII

Step III of an input is: 94 car 86 window shut 52 31 house. 50

REASONING MADE EASY

5.


Which of the following is definitely the input? a) 94 car window 86 shut 52 31 house b) 80 window 94 car shut 52 31 house c) car shut window 86 52 31 house 94 d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

Directions (Q. 6-11) Given an input line the machine arranges the words and numbers in steps in a systematic manner as illustrated below Input line 59 dress fine shine 32 66 72 offer Step I 72 56 dress fine shine 32 66 offer Step II 72 shine 56 dress fine 32 66 offer Step III 72 shine 66 56 dress fine 32 offer Step IV 72 shine 66 offer 56 dress fine 32 Step V 72 shine 66 offer 56 fine dress 32 Step VI 72 shine 66 offer 56 fine 32 dress Step VI is the last step and the output in Step Vi is the final output. As per the rules followed in the above steps, find out in each of the following questions the appropriate step for the given input. 6. Step IV of an input is ’62 sound 56 sleep roam present 33 49’. What will be the input definitely? a) sound 62 sleep 56 roam present 33 49 b) sleep sound 62 56 roam present 33 49 c) 62 sound sleep 56 roam present 33 49 d) Cannot be determined e) None of these 7. Which of the following will be the t hird step for input jockey firm 36 43 growth chart 22 45? a) 45 jockey 43 growth firm 36 chart 22 b) 45 jockey 43 firm growth 36 chart 22 c) 45 jockey 43 growth 36 firm chart 22 d) 45 jockey 43 firm 36 growth chart 22 e) None of these 8. Step II of an input is ’53 window 42 50 door lock key 36’. How many more steps will be required to complete the arrangement? a) Three b) Four c) Five d) Six e) None of these

51

REASONING MADE EASY


9. What will be the fifth step of an input whose first step is ’85 journey train 36 54 daily 28 mansion’? a) 85 train 54 mansion 28 journey daily 36 b) 85 train 54 mansion journey 36 daily 28 c) 85 train 54 mansion 36 journey daily 28 d) There is no such step e) None of these 10. Which step will bed the last step for an I nput whose second step is 63’ Sour 18 56 grapes healthy 32 rise’? a) IV b) V c) VIII d) VII e) None of these 11. Which word/number will be sixth from right in step fifth whose second step is ’63 Sour 18 56 grapes healthy 32 rise’? a) Rise b) 56 c) Sour d) 32 e) 18

Directions (Q. 12-16) Read the following information carefully and answer the given questions. A word/number arrangement machine when given an input line of words and numbers rearrange them following a particular rule in each step. The following is an illustration of input and rearrangement. (All the numbers are two digits numbers)

Input: 33 food water 19 42 air 27 54 72 fire lunch 62 cool not Step 1: 19, 33 food 42 air 27 54 72 fire lunch 62 cool not water Step 2: 27 19 33 food 42 air 54 72 fire lunch 62 cool water not Step 3: 33 27 19 food 42 air 54 72 fire 62 cool water not lunch Step 4: 42 33 27 19 air 54 72 fire 62 cool water not lunch food Step 5: 54 42 33 27 19 air 72 62 cool water not lunch food fire Step 6: 62 54 42 33 27 19 air 72 water not lunch food fire cool Step 7: 72 62 54 42 33 27 19 water not lunch food fire cool air And step 7 is the last step of the above input, as the desired arrangement is obtained. As per the rules followed in the above steps, find out in each of the following questions the appropriate step for the given input. Input: Rail 43 27 Book Coach 56 Ticket waiting confirm 62 35 72 sleeper 16 (All the numbers are two digit numbers) 12.

Which step number is the following output? ’56 43 35 27 16 Book Coach 62 72 waiting ticket sleeper rail confirm a) Step 4 b) Step 5 c) Step 6 d) Step 7 e) None of these 52

REASONING MADE EASY


13.

Which of the following step represents the maximum gap between Ticket’ and 35’? a) Step 2 b) Step 3 c) Step 4 d) Step 5 e) None of these

14.

In step 5, if Book’ is related to waiting’ and in the same way 27’ is related to 62’. Which of the following would 72’ be related to in the same pattern? a) Ticket b) Rail c) Sleeper d) 35 e) None of these

15.

In step 4, which of the following word/number would be at 4th position from the left end? a) 16 b) 27 c) Book d) Rail e) None of these

16.

Which of the following would be one of the steps? a) 27 16 Rail 43 Book Coach 56 Confirm 62 35 sleeper 72 waiting Ticket b) 43 35 27 16 Book Coach Confirm 62 56 72 waiting sleeper Ticket Rail c) 62 56 43 35 27 16 72 waiting sleeper ticket Rail confirm Coach Book d) 35 27 16 Rail 43 Book Coach 56 Confirm 62 72 waiting Ticket sleeper e) 56 43 35 27 16 Book confirm 62 72 waiting Ticket sleeper Rail coach

Directions (Q. 17-23) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions based on it. A set of words and numbers is passed through on arrangement machine and following rearrangement is obtained.

Input talk 48 11 rude 97 84 35 walk jug home 25 bag 77 alone Step I 97 talk 48 11 rude 84 35 walk jug home 25 77 alone bag Step II 97 84 talk 48 11 rude 35 walk jug 25 77 alone bag home Step III 97 84 77 talk 48 11 rude 35 walk 25 alone bag home jug Step IV 97 84 77 48 talk 11 35 walk 25 alone bag home jug rude Step V 97 84 77 48 35 11 nwalk 25 alone bag home jug rude talk Step VI 97 84 77 48 35 25 11 alone bag home jug rude talk walk Step VI is the last step of rearrangement. Now, a set of words and letters is given below. As per the rules followed in above steps, answer the questions based on it. Input: 81 who sit 19 32 not but ink flow 51 27 van 68 92 17.

Which is the last step of this input? a) V b) VI d) VIII e) None of these

c) VII

53

REASONING MADE EASY


18.

Which of the following is the Step III? a) 92 81 68 who sit 19 32 not 51 27 van but flow ink b) 92 81 68 51 who sit 32 19 not 27 van but flow ink c) 92 81 68 51 who sit 19 32 not 27 van but flow ink d) 92 81 68 51 32 who sit 19 not 27 van but flow ink e) None of these

19.

Which step is ’92 81 68 51 32 27 who 19 van but flow ink not sit’? a) Step IV b) Step V c) Step III d) Step VI e) None of these

20.

Which is third element to the right from the sixth element from the right end in Step II? a) 32 b) van c) 27 d) floe e) 25

21.

How many elements are there between “who” and “van” in Step IV? a) 3 b) 5 c) 4 d) 0 e) 1

22.

In Step V, if 92’ is related to sit’ and 81’ is related to not’, similarly, 68 is related to which element? a) ink b) flow c) but d) sit e) none of these

23.

In Step II, if not’ is related 92’, 51’ is related to 68’, van’ is related to sit’, in the same way flow’ is related to which element? a) 81 b) who c) 19 d) 32 e) 23

Directions (Q. 24-28) Study the given information and answer the following questions. When a word and number arrangement machine is given an input line of words and numbrs, it arranges them following a particular rule. The following is an illustration of input and rearrangement. (All the numbers are two digit numbers)

Input Step I Step II Step III Step IV Step V Step VI Step VII

40 made butter 23 37 cookies salt extra 52 86 92 fell now 19 butter 19 40 made 23 37 cookies salt extra 52 86 92 fell now cookies 23 butter 19 40 made 37 salt extra 52 86 92 fell now extra 37 cookies 23 butter 19 40 made salt 52 86 92 fell now fell 40 extra 37 cookies 23 butter 19 made salt 52 86 92 now made 52 fell 40 extra 37 cookies 23 butter 19 salt 86 92 now now 86 made 52 fell 40 extra 37 cookies 23 butter 19 salt 92 salt 92 now 86 made 52 fell 40 extra 37 cookies 23 butter 19 54

REASONING MADE EASY


Step VII is the last step of the above arrangement as the intended arrangement is obtained. As per the rules followed in the given steps, find out the appropriate steps for the given input. Input 32 proud girl beautiful 48 55 97 rich family 61 72 17 nice life 24.

How many steps will be required to complete the given input? a) Five b) Six c) Seven d) Eight e) Nine

25.

Which of the following is the third element from the left end of step VI? a) Beautiful b) Life c) 61 d) Nice e) 17

26.

Which of the following is step III of the given input? a) proud 72 girl 48 family 32 beautiful 17 55 97 rich 61 nice life b) life 55 girl 48 family 32 beautiful 17 proud 97 r ich 61 72 n icd)e c) girl 48 family 32 beautiful 17 proud 55 97 rich 61 72 nice life d) family 32 beautiful 17 proud girl 48 55 97 rich 61 72 nice life e) girl 48 life 55 family 32 beautiful 17 proud 97 rich 61 72 nice

27.

What is the position of nice’ from the left end in the final step? a) 5th b) 6th c) 7th d) 8th e) 9th

28.

Which element is third to the right of family’ in step V? a) Beautiful b) 17 c) Proud d) 18 e) None of these

Directions (Q. 29-33) Study the given information and answer the following questions. When a word and number arrangement machine is given an input line of words and numbers, it arranges them following a particular rule. T he following is an illustration of an input and rearrangement.

Input: 45 navel change 33 48 down town frown 62 88 98 gesture orange 21 Step I: 45 navel change 33 48 down frown 62 88 98 gesture orange town 21 Step II: 45 navel change 48 down frown 62 88 98 gesture town 21 orange 33 Step III: change 48 down frown 62 88 98 gesture t own 21 orange 33 navel 45 Step IV: change down frown 62 88 98 town 21 orange 33 navel 45 gesture 48 Step V: change down 88 98 town 21 orange 33 navel 45 gesture 48 frown 62 Step VI: change 98 town 21 orange 33 navel 45 gesture 48 frown 62 down 88 Step VII: town 21 orange 33 navel 45 gesture 48 frown 62 down 88 change 98

55

REASONING MADE EASY


Step VII is the last step of the above arrangement as the intended arrangement is obtained. As per the rules followed inj the given steps, find out the appropriate steps for the given input.

Input: 35 quant hear cute 50 65 98 silent giant 71 82 19 Oliver melody 29.

How many steps will be required to complete the given input? a) Five b) Six c) Seven d) Eight e) None of these

30.

Which of the following is the fourth element from the left end of Step VI? a) cute b) melody c) 71 d) oliver e) None of these

31.

What is the position of melody’ from the left end in the final step? a) Sixth b) Seventh c) First d) Fifth e) Ninth

32.

Which element is fourth to the right of giant’ in Step V? a) cute b) 19 c) quant d) 98 e) 35

33.

Which of the following is Step III of the given input? a) quant 82 hear 50 giant 35 cute 19 65 98 silent 71 oliver melody b) hear cute 65 98 giant 71 82 melody silent 19 quant 35 oliver 50 c) hear cute 98 giant 71 82 silent 19 quant 35 oliver 50 melody 65 d) hear cute 98 65 giant 71 82 melody silent 19 quant 35 oliver 50 e) None of these

Directions (Q. 34-38) Study the following information to answer the given questions. A word and number arrangement machine when given an input line of words and numbers rearranges them following a particular rule. The following is an illustration of input and rearrangement. (All the numbers are two-digit numbers.)

Input: yogurt jovial 48 cinema total 20 correct sunny thin 78 Step I: 20 total yogurt jovial 48 cinema correct sunny thin 78 Step II: 20 total 48 jovial yogurt cinema correct sunny thin 78 Step III: 20 total 48 jovial 78 thin yogurt cinema correct sunny Step IV: 20 total 48 jovial 78 thin yogurt sunny cinema correct Step V: 20 total 48 jovial 78 thin yogurt sunny correct cinema

56

REASONING MADE EASY


Step V is the last step of the rearrangement. As per the rules followed in the above steps, find out in each of the following questions the appropriate step for the following input.

Input: united madrid 89 chair 21 aircraft liverpool beneath honey 11 everyday 34.

Which step number will be the following output? 11 honey 21 chair 89 madrid united aircraft liverpool beneath everyday a) Step II b) Step III c) Step IV d) There will be no such step e) None of these

35.

How many steps will be required to get the final output? a) Five b) Six c) Seven d) Four e) None of these

36.

Which word/number would be the fifth from the right in Step V? a) Madrid b) United c) 89 d) Liverpoor e) None of these

37.

What is the position of beneath’ in Step IV? a) 9th from the left th b) 11 from the left c) 2nd from the right d) 4th from the right e) None of these

38.

If in a certain way honey’ is related to aircraft’ and chair’ is related to beneath’ then madrid’ would be related to which of the following in the last step? a) 21 b) United c) Everyday d) Liverpool e) None of these

Directions (Q. 39-43) Given an input line the machine arranges the words and numbers in steps in a systematic manner as illustrated below: Input: Step I: Step II: Step III: Step IV: Step V: Step VI:

56 dress fine shine 32 66 72 offer 72 56 dress fine shine 32 66 offer 72 shine 56 dress fine 32 66 offer 72 shine 66 56 dress fine 32 offer 72 shine 66 offer 56 dress fine 32 72 shine 66 offer 56 fine dress 32 72 shine 66 offer 56 fine 32 dress 57

REASONING MADE EASY


Step VI is the last step and the output in Step VI I is the final output. As per the rules followed in the above steps, find out in each of the following questions the appropriate step for the given input. 39.

Step IV of an input is ’62 sound 56 sleep roam present 33 49’. What willl be the input definitely? a) sound 62 sleep 56 roam present 33 49 b) sleep sound 62 56 roam present 33 49 c) 62 sound sleep 56 roam present 33 49 d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

40.

Which of the following will be the third step for input: jockey firm 36 43 growth chart 22 45 ? a) 45 jockey 43 growth firm 36 chart 22 b) 45 jockey 43 firm growth 36 chart 22 c) 45 jockey 43 growth 36 firm chart 22 d) 45 jockey 43 firm 36 growth chart 22 e) None of these

41.

Step II of an input is ’53 wi ndow 42 50 door lock key 36’. How many more steps will be required to complete the arrangement? a) Three b) Four c) Five d) Six e) None of these

42.

What will be the fifth step of an input whose first step is ’85 journey train 36 54 daily 28 mansion’? a) 85 train 54 mansion 28 journey daily 36 b) 85 train 54 mansion journey 36 daily 28 c) 85 train 54 mansion 36 journey daily 28 d) There is no such step e) None of these

43.

Which step will be the last step for an input whose second step is ’63 sour 18 56 grapes healthy 32 rise’? a) IV b) V c) VIII d) VII e) None of these

Directions (Q. 44-49) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions. A word and number arrangement machine when given an input line of words and numbers rearranges them following a particular rule in each step. The following is an illustration of input and rearrangement. 58

REASONING MADE EASY

Input:

shop 17 table 20 53 oven desk 39

Step I: Step II: Step III: Step IV: Step V:

17 shop table 20 53 oven desk 39 17 table shop 20 53 oven desk 39 17 table 20 shop 53 oven desk 39 17 table 20 shop 39 53 oven desk 17 table 20 shop 39 oven 53 desk


And step V is the last step of the rearrangement. As per the rules followed in the above steps, find out in each of the following questions that appropriate step for the given input. 44.

Step II of an input is : 15 yes 62 51 48 talk now gone Which of the following will be step VI? a) 15 yes 48 talk 51 now gone 62 b) 15 yes 48 talk 51 62 now gone c) 15 yes 48 talk 51 now 62 gone d) There will be no such step e) None of the above

45.

Step III of an input is: 21 victory 30 joint 64 47 all gone How many more steps will be required to complete the rearrangement? a) Three b) Four c) Five d) Six e) None of these

46.

Input : 89 bind 32 goal house 61 12 joy How many steps will be required to complete the arrangement? a) Four b) Five c) Six d) Seven e) None of these

47.

Input: save 21 43 78 them early 36 for Which of the following steps will be the last but one? a) VI b) VII c) VIII d) V e) None of these

48.

Input: desire 59 63 all few 38 46 zone How many steps will be required to complete the rearrangement? a) Four b) Five c) Six d) Seven e) None of these

49.

Input: win 92 task 73 59 house range 34 Which of the following will be step IV of the above input? a) 34 win 59 task 73 range 92 house b) 34 win 92 59 task 73 house range c) 34 win 92 task 73 59 house range 59

REASONING MADE EASY


d) There will be no such step e) None of the above

Directions (Q. 50-54) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions. A word and number arrangement machine when given an input line of words and numbers rearranges them following a particular rule in each step. The following is an illustration of input and rearrangement. Input: Step I: Step II: Step III: Step IV: Step V:

base 35 or gone 62 49 87 ahead 87 base 35 or gone 62 49 ahead 87 ahead base 35 or gone 62 49 87 ahead 62 base 35 or gone 49 87 ahead 62 base 49 35 or gone 87 ahead 62 base 49 gone 35 or

And Step V is the last step of the rearrangement. As per the rules followed in the above steps, find out in each of the following question the appropriate step for the given input. 50.

Input: how was your stay 56 25 36 64 Which of the following will be step VI? a) 64 how 56 was your stay 25 36 b) 64 how 56 stay 36 was 25 your c) 64 how 56 stay 36 was your 25 d) There will be no such step e) None of the above

51.

Input: power fail now 52 24 75 gate 34 Which of the following steps will be the last but one? a) IV b) V c) VI d) VII e) None of these

52.

Step III of an input is: 91 car 85 14 27 few new house Which of the following is definitely the input? a) 85 14 91 car 27 few new house b) car 91 85 14 27 few new house c) car 85 14 27 few new house 91 d) Cannot be determined e) None of the above

53.

Step II of an input is: 75 down 16 24 farm eager 62 sky How many more steps will be required to complete the rearrangement? a) Four b) Five c) Six d) Seven e) None of these 60

REASONING MADE EASY

54.


Input: 14 35 when they same 61 48 home How many steps will be required to complete the rearrangement? a) Four b) Five c) Six d) Seven e) None of these

Directions (Q. 55-60) A word and number aran gement machine when given an input line of words and numbers rearranges them following a particular rule in each step. The following is an illustration of input and rearrangement. Input: Step I: Step II: Step III: Step IV: Step V: Step VI:

but 32 71 glory fair south 65 84 south but 32 71 glory fair 65 84 south 84 but 32 71 glory fair 65 south 84 glory but 32 71 fair 65 south 84 glory 71 but 32 fair 65 south 84 glory 71 fair but 32 65 south 84 glory 71 fair 65 but 32

And Step VI is the last step of the rearrangement. As per the rules followed in the above steps, find out in each of the following questions the appropriate step for the given input. 55.

Step III of an input is: year 92 ultra 15 23 strive house 39. How many more steps will be required to complete the rearrangement? a) Three b) Four c) Two d) Five e) None of these

56.

Input: any how 49 24 far wide 34 69 Which of the following steps will be the last but one? a) VI b) VII d) VIII e) None of these

57.

Step II of an input is: town 74 pair 15 31 nice job 42 Which of the following is definitely the input? a) pair 15 31 town nice job 42 74 b) pair 15 town 31 74 nice job 42 c) pair 15 town 74 31 nice job 42 d) Cannot be determined e) None of the above

58.

Input: play over 49 37 12 match now 81 Which of the following will be step IV? a) play 81 over 49 37 match now b) play 8 over 49 37 12 match now c) play 81over 49 now 37 match 12 d) There will be no such step

c) V

61

REASONING MADE EASY


e) None of the above 59.

Step II of an input is: war 58 box cart 33 49 star 24 Which of the following steps will be the last? a) V b) VI c) IV d) VII e) None of these

60.

Input: shower fall water 34 51 67 98 goal How many steps will be required to complete the rearrangement? a) Three b) Four c) Six d) Five e) None of these

Directions (Q. 61-66) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions. A word and number arrangement machine when given an input line of words and numbers rearranges them following a particular rule in each step. The following is an illustration of input and rearrangement.

Input: Step I: Step II: Step III: Step IV: Step V:

joy far 35 27 16 96 height star 96 joy far 35 27 16 height star 96 far joy 35 27 16 height star 96 far 35 joy 27 16 height star 96 far 35 height joy 27 16 star 96 far 35 height 27 joy 16 star

And step V is the last step of the rearrangement. As per the rules followed in the abov steps, find out in each of t he following questions the appropriate step for the given input. 61.

Input: organize 19 12 stable room 35 72 house How many steps will be required to complete the arrangement? a) Five b) Six c) Seven d) Four e) None of the above

62.

Input: bake never store 51 26 33 age 49 Which of the following will be step V? a) 51 age 49 bake 33 never 26 store b) 51 age 49 bake never store 26 33 c) 51 age bake never store 26 33 49 d) 51 bake never store 26 33 age 49 e) There will be no such step

63.

Input: always go there 39 62 47 time 24 Which of the following steps will be the last but one? 62

REASONING MADE EASY

a) VI d) IX

b) VII e) None of these


c) VIII

64.

Step II of an input is: 67 ask 34 12 46 for my date Which o f the f ollowing is definitely the input? a) 34 12 46 for my date ask 67 b) 34 12 46 for my date 67 ask c) 12 34 67 ask 46 for my date d) Cannot be determined e) None of the above

65.

Step III of an input is: 84 for 56 29 17 won loss game Which of the following steps will be the last? a) VIII b) IX c) VII d) V e) None of these

66.

Step III of an input is: 86 box 63 18 gear card 51 new How many more steps will be required to complete the arrangement? a) Three b) Two c) Four d) Five e) None of these

Directions (Q. 67-71) Given an input line the machine rearranges them step by step as per the illustration given below. Input: Step I: Step II: Step III: Step IV: Step V: Step VI: Step VII:

show must 73 85 go 69 on 32 32 show must 73 85 go 69 on 32 go show must 73 85 69 on 32 go 69 show must 73 85 on 32 go 69 must show 73 85 on 32 go 69 must 73 show 85 on 32 go 69 must 73 on show 85 32 go 69 must 73 on 85 show

Step VII is the last step and the arrangement in Step VII is the final arrangement. As per the rules followed in the above steps, find out in each of the following questions the appropriate step for the given input. 67.

If the third step of an input is “14 but 26 not just 63 fundamental 47”, which of the following is definitely the input? a) 26 14 but not just 63 fundamental 47 b) 63 26 but 14 not just 63 fundamental 47 c) fundamental 26 but not just 63 47 d) Cannot be determined e) None of the above

63

REASONING MADE EASY


68.

First step of an input is “34 fire dress well 63 43 prime 52”. Which st ep is the last but one? a) IV b) III c) VI d) VII e) V

69.

What will be the fourth step for the following input? Input: just in time for 36 48 14 59 a) 14 for 36 in just time 48 59 b) 14 for 36 just in time 48 59 c) 14 for 36 in 48 just time 59 d) Cannot be determined e) None of the above

70.

If the second step of an input is “23 fine 49 sixty rely 38 56 next”, how many more steps will be r equired t o complete the arrangement? a) 2 b) 5 c) 6 d) 4 e) None of these

71.

If the second step for an input is “17 do foreign 95 74 heights mountain 29”, what will be the fifth step? a) 17 do 29 foreign heights 74 95 mountain b) 17 do 29 foreign 74 mountain heights 95 c) 17 do 29 foreign 74 heights 95 mountain d) There will be no such step e) None of the above

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Option C Option E Option A Option B Option D Option D Option A Option B Option C Option E Option B Option B Option B Option B Option A Option D 64

REASONING MADE EASY

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44.

Option C Option C Option C Option B Option A Option A Option D Option C Option D Option C Option A Option B Option C Option E Option C Option C Option B Option B Option B Option B Option C Option C Option D Option A Option B Option C Option E Option C Step II: Step III: Step IV: Step V: Step VI:

45.


15 yes 62 51 48 talk now gone 15 yes 48 62 51 talk now gone 15 yes 48 talk 62 51 now gone 5 yes 48 talk 51 62 now gone 15 yes 48 talk 51 now 62 gone

Option E Step III: 21 victory 30 joint 64 47 all gone Step IV: 21 victory 30 joint 47 64 all gone Step V: 21 victory 30 joint 47 gone 64 all So, step V is the last step. Hence, two steps will be required.

46.

Option C Input: Step I:

89 bind 32 goal house 61 12 joy 12 89 bind 32 goal house 61 joy 65

REASONING MADE EASY


Step II: 12 joy 89 bind 32 goal house 61 Step III: 12 joy 32 89 bind goal house 61 Step IV: 12 joy 32 house 89 bind goal 61 Step V: 12 joy 32 house 61 89 bind goal Step VI: 12 joy 32 house 61 goal 89 bind Step VI is the last step. So, to complete the arrangement, six steps will be required. 47.

Option E Input: save 21 43 78 them early 36 for Step I: 21 save 43 78 them early 36 for Step II: 21 them save 43 78 early 36 for Step III: 21 them 36 save 43 78 early for Step IV: 21 them 36 save 43 for 78 early Step IV is the last step and from last step first one is step IV.

48.

Option B Input: desire 59 63 all few 38 46 zone Step I: 38 desire 59 63 all few 46 zone Step II: 38 zone desire 59 63 all few 46 Step III: 38 zone 46 desire 59 63 all few Step IV: 38 zone 46 few d esire 59 63 all Step V: 38 zone 46 few 59 desire 63 all So, the last step is step V.

49.

Option E Input: Step I: Step II: Step III: Step IV:

50.

win 92 task 73 59 house range 34 34 win 92 task 73 59 house range 34 win 59 92 task 73 house range 34 win 59 task 92 73 house range 34 win 59 task 73 92 house range

Option D Input: how was your stay 56 25 36 64 Step I: 64 how was your stay 56 25 36 Step II: 64 how 56 was your stay 25 36 Step III: 64 how 56 stay was your 25 36 Step IV: 64 how 56 stay 36 was your 25 Step V: 64 how 56 stay 36 was 25 your So, sixth step is not possible because fifth step will be last step.

51.

Option D 66

REASONING MADE EASY


Input: power fail now 52 24 75 gate 34 Step I: 75 power fail now 52 24 gate 34 Step II: 75 fail power now 52 24 gate 34 Step III: 75 fail 52 power now 24 gate 34 Step IV: 75 fail 52 gate power now 24 34 Step V: 75 fail 52 gate 34 power now 24 Step VI: 75 fail 52 gate 34 now power 24 Step VII: 75 fail 52 gate 34 now 24 power So, the first step from the last is step (VII). 52.

Option D Input cannot be determined.

53.

Option A Step II: 75 down 16 24 farm eager 62 sky Step III: 75 down 62 16 24 farm eager sky Step IV: 75 down 62 eager 16 24 farm sky Step V: 75 down 62 eager 24 16 farm sky Step VI: 75 down 62 eager 24 farm 16 sky Four more steps are required to complete the rearrangement.

54.

Option C Input: 14 35 when they came 61 48 home Step I: 61 14 35 when they came 48 home Step II: 61 came 14 35 when they 48 home Step III: 61 came 48 14 35 when they h ome Step IV: 61 came 48 home 14 35 when they Step V: 61 came 48 home 35 14 when they Step VI: 61 came 48 home 35 they 14 when To complete the rearrangement 6 steps are required.

55.

Option B Step III: year 92 ultra 15 23 strive house 39 Step IV: year 92 ultra 39 15 23 strive house Step V: year 92 ultra 39 strive 15 23 house Step VI: year 92 ultra 39 strive 23 15 house Step VII: year 92 ultra 39 strive 23 house 15 So, four more steps are required.

56.

Option C 67

REASONING MADE EASY


Input: any how 49 24 for wide 34 69 Step I: wide any how 49 24 for 34 69 Step II: wide 69 any how 49 24 for 34 Step III: wide 69 how any 49 24 for 34 Step IV: wide 69 how 49 any 24 for 34 Step V: wide 69 how 49 for any 24 34 Step VI: wide 69 how 49 f or 34 any 24 So, step V is first step from last. 57.

Option D Step II: town 74 pair 15 31 nice job 42 Input cannot be determined.

58.

Option D Input: play over 49 37 12 match now 81 Step I: play 81 over 49 37 12 match now Step II: play 81 over 49 now 37 12 match Step III: play 81 over 49 now 37 match 12 th 4 step cannot be determined.

59.

Option B Step II: war 58 box cart 33 49 star 24 Step III: war 58 star box cart 33 49 24 Step IV: war 58 star 49 box cart 33 24 Step V: war 58 star 49 cart box 33 24 Step VI: war 58 star 49 cart 33 box 24 So, last step is step VI.

60.

Option D Input: shower fall water 34 51 67 98 goal Step I: water shower fall 34 5167 98 goal Step II: water 98 shower fall 34 51 67 goal Step III: water 98 shower 67 fall 34 51 goal Step IV: water 98 shower 67 goal fall 34 51 Step V: water 98 shower 67 goal 51 fall 34 Five steps required to complete the rearrangement.

61.

Option D Input: Step I: Step II:

organize 19 12 stable room 35 72 house 72 organize 19 12 stable room 35 house 72 house organize 19 12 stable room 35 68

REASONING MADE EASY


Step III: 72 house 35 organize 19 12 stable room Step IV: 72 house 35 organize 19 room 12 stable So, four steps will required to complete the arrangement. 62.

Option A Input: Step I: Step II: Step III: Step IV: Step V:

63.

Option E Input: Step I: Step II: Step III: Step IV:

64.

bake never store 51 26 33 age 49 51 bake never store 26 33 age 49 51 age bake never store 26 33 49 51 age 49 bake never store 26 33 51 age 49 bake 33 never store 26 51 age 49 bake 33 never 26 store

always go there 39 62 47 time 24 62 always go there 39 47 time 24 62 always 47 go there 39 time 24 62 always 47 go 39 there time 24 62 always 47 go 39 there 24 time

Option D Input cannot be determined by given step.

65.

Option D Step III: 84 for 56 29 17 won loss game Step IV: 84 for 56 game 29 17 won loss Step V: 84 for 56 game 29 loss 17 won So, the last step is step V.

66.

Option A Step III: 86 box 63 18 gear card 51 new Step IV: 86 box 63 card 18 gear 51 new Step V: 86 box 63 card 51 18 gear new Step VI: 86 box 63 card 51 gear 18 new So, to complete the arrangement three steps are required.

67. 68. 69. 70. 71.

Option D Option C Option A Option D Option C 69

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter - 3 Data Sufficiency Directions (Q. 1-3) Each of the questions below consists of a question and three statements numbered I, II and III given below it. You have to decide whether the data provided in the statements are suficient to answer the question. Give Answer: 1. How many daughters does W have? I. B and D are sisters of M. M’s father T is husband of W II. III. Out of the three children which T has, only one is a boy. a) Only I and III b) All I, II and III c) Only II and III d) Question cannot be answered even with all I, II and III e) Only I and II 2.

Who among A, B, C, D, E and F each having a different height, is the tallest? I. B is taller than A but shorter than E. II. Only two of them are shorter than C. III. D is taller than only F. a) Only I and II b) Only I and III c) Only II and III d) All I, II and III are required to answer the question e) All I, II and III are not sufficient to answer the question

3.

Towards which direction is village J from village W? I. Village R is to the west of village W and to the north of village T. II. Village Z is to the east of village J and to the South of village T. III. Village M is to the noirth east of Village J and north of Village Z. a) Only III b) Only II and III c) All I, II and III are required to answer the question d) Question cannot be answered even with all I, II and III e) None of these

70

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 4-8) Below is given a passage followed by several possible inferences which can drawn from the facts stated in the passage. You have to examine each inference separately in the context of the passage and decide upon its degree of truth or falsity. Give answer: If the inference is definitely true’ i.e. it properly from the statement of facts a) given. If the inference is probably true’ through not definitely true’ in the light of b) the facts given. If the data are inadequate’, i.e. from the facts given you cannot say whether c) the inference is likely to be true or false. If the inference is probably false’, though not definitely false’ in the light d) of the facts given. If the inference is definitely false’, i.e. it cannot possibly be drawn from e) the facts given or it contradicts the given facts. Between 2002-03 and 2006-2007, Indian economy grew annualy at 8.7% led by the services sector at 9% per year. In 1990, India’s share of services, at 40% of GDP was consistent with its per capita income for low-income country. By 2001 its share of one-half of the GDP was higher by five percentage points, compared to the average for low-income countries. Economic reforms that energized the private corporate sector and technological changes that opened up new vistas in telecommunications, IT and outsourcing are believed to be responsible for th e impressive performance. However, the services led growth remains a puzzle at a low per capita income, with 55% of the work force still engaged in agriculture, and when agriculture decelerated and industry stagnated-3 defying a styled fact in economics. 4.

India has now emerged as a high per capita income country.

5.

Growth in India’s services sector post 2005 is more than 9%.

6.

Less than half of total workforce is engaged in Agricultural sector in India.

7. Share of services sector in India’s GDP has crossed the half way mark in early 2000. 8. In early minutes, the share of services sector in GDP for low per capita income group of countries is about 40%

71

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 9-13) below are given a passage followed by several possible inferences which can be drawn from the facts stated in the passage. You have to examine each in ference separately in the context of the passage and decide upon its degree of truth or falsity. Give answer: If the inference is “definitely true” i.e. it properly follows from the a) statements of facts given. If the inference is “probably true” thuogh not “definitely true” in the light of b) the facts given. c) If the data are inadequate i.e. from the facts given you can not say whether the inference is likely to be true or false. If the inference is “probably false” though not “definitely false” in the light d) of the facts given. If the inference is “definitely false” i.e. it cannot possibly be drawn from the e) facts given or it contradicts the given facts. A recent report that satellite data shws groundwater levels in northern India depleting by as much as a foot per year, over the past decade, is a matter of concern. The clear writing on the wall is that India faces a turbulent water future and veritable crisis without proactive policy and sustainable practices. Besides, the poor monsoon this season and the resultant drought situation pan-India, calls series of glaring anomalies do need to be addressed. For one, there’s far too much reliance on groundwater. For another, out water infrastructure for storage and supply is sorely inadequate. Worse, policy distortions in artificially under pricing key agri-inputs like power have perversely incentivised cultivation of water intensive crops like paddy in traditionally wheat growing areas. 9. India has failed to take measures to recharge groundwater adequately in northern part. 10.

Wheat cultivation in India requires comparatively more water than paddy.

11.

Water level in other parts of India is stable during the last decade.

12. India has now put in place a system to reduce over dependence on groundwater. 13. Adequate monsoon helps in drawing less ground water for cultivation and thus preserve balance. In making decisions about important questions, it is desirable to be able to distinguish between “strong” arguments and “weak” arguments. “Strong” arguments must be both important and directly related to the question. “Weak” 72

REASONING MADE EASY


arguments may not be directly related to the question and may be of minor importance or m ay be related to the trivial aspects of the question.

Directions (Q. 14-18) Each of the questions below consists of a question and two statements numb ered I and II given below it. You have to decide whether the data provided in the statements are sufficient to answer the question. Read both the statements and give answer: a) b) c) d) e)

If the data in Statement I alone are sufficient to answer the question, while the data in Statement II alone are not sufficient to answer the question. If the data in Statement II alone are sufficient to answer the question, while the data in Statement I alone are not sufficient to answer the question. If the data either in Statement I alone or in Statement II alone are sufficient to answer the question. If the data even in both Statements I and II together are not sufficient to answer the question. If the data in both Statements I and II together are necessary to answer the question.

14.

What is the position of point F with respect to point I? I. Point G is 5 km east of point F. Point S is 5 km north of point G. Point H is the midpoint of points G and S. Point I is to the south of point H in such a manner that point G is the midpoint of points H and I. II. Point A is 10 km east of point F. Point B is 5 km south of point A. Point H is the midpoint of points A and B. Point I is 5 km south of point H. Point I is to the east of point L at a distance of 5 km.

15.

On which day of a week Lalita did her reservation for the journey? I. The husband of Lalita correctly remembers that she has done reservation after Monday but before Sunday. However, it is almost certain that she did not make her reservation on Wednesday. II. The daughter of Lalita correctly remembers that h er mother has done her reservation after Tuesday but before Saturday. Since her mother was busy on Thursday so she did not make her reservation on Thursday.

16.

Seven persons - P, Q, R, S, T, U and V are standing in a straight line facing towards north. Find the position of S from the right end. I. P is standing on any of the extreme ends of the line. There are two persons between P and R. There are two persons between R and Q. U is not standing to the immediate left of R. II. R is standing exactly at the centre. T is standing exactly between R and V. There is only one person between T and U. S is standing to the immediate right of U. 73

REASONING MADE EASY


17.

How are N and D related? I. A is the sister of D. II. D is the mother of R who is the only son of N.

18.

Who amongst Ronak, Sanjay, Anish and Rohan is the tallest? I. Ronak is as tall as Sanjay. II. Anish is taller than Rohan.

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

16. 17.

18.

Option C Option C Option E Option A Option B Option D Option A It is true as given in second line of the passage “In 1990, India’s share of services at 40% of GDP ____ Option D Option D Option B Option A Option E Option E Option C Option E From Statement I Lalita made her reservation on either Tuesday, Thursday, Friday or Saturday. From Statement II Lalita made her reservation on Wednesday or Friday. From both the statements Lalita made her reservation on Friday. Option B Option B From statement I A is the sister of D. There is no information about N. From statement II D is the mother of R. R is the son of N. So, N is husband of D. Option D From statement I Ronak = Sanjay From statement II 74

REASONING MADE EASY


Anish > Rohan From both the statements Anish > Rohan Ronak = Sanjay

75

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter - 4 Sitting Arrangements Directions (Q. 1-5) Study the following information to answer the given questions. i) ii) iii) iv) 1.

2.

There are 9 friends A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H seated in a circle facing the centre. AC, DG, HE and FB are seated adjacent to each other. A is also seated adjacent to H. nd B is 2 to the right of H. E is 3rd to the right of C. Who is 2nd to the left of A? a) D d) Cannot be determined

b) G e) None of these

c) F

Who is 3rd to the left of C? a) G d) Cannot be determined

b) D e) None of these

c) B

3.

What is C’s position with reference to E? th th th a) 5 to the right b) 4 to the left c) 4 to the right d) 3rd to the right e) Cannot be determined

4.

Who is 2nd to the right of A? a) B d) Cannot be determined

5.

b) E e) None of these

c) F

Who among the following pairs may not be seated adjacent to each other? a) AH b) DC c) EB d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

Directions (Q. 6-11) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow. Seven friends A, B, C, D, E, F and G are sitting around a circular table facing either the centre or outside. Each one of them belongs to a different department viz. Finance, Marketing Sales, HR, Corporate Finance, Investment Banking and Operations but not necessarily in the same order. C sits third to the right of G. G faces the centre. Only one person sits between C and the person working in the HR department immediate neighbours of C face outside. Only one person sits between F and D. Both F and D face the centre. D does not work in the HR department. A works in Investment Banking 76

REASONING MADE EASY


Department. A faces the centre. Two people sit between the persons who work in Investment Banking and Marketing Departments. The person who works in Corporate Finance sits to the immediate left of E. C faces same direction as E. The person who works in corporate finance sits to the immediate left of the person who works for Operations Department. 6.

For which of the following departments does B work? a) Finance b) Marketing c) HR d) Corporate Finance e) Operationsd

7.

What is position of B with respect to the person who works for Sales Department? a) Immediate right b) Third to the left c) Second to the right d) Second to the left e) Fourth to the right

8.

Who sits to the immediate right of E? a) The person who works for Marketing Department b) C c) B d) The person who works for HR Department e) A

9.

Who amongst the following sits exactly between C and the person who works for HR Department? a) B b) The person who works for Marketing Department c) The person who works for Operations Department d) D e) G

10.

Who amongst the following sit between the persons who work for Marketing and Investment Banking departments when counted for the left hand side of the person working for Marketing Department? a) F and G b) E and C c) C and B d) F and D e) B and D

11.

How many people sit between the person who workds for Operations Department and A, when counted from the right hand side of A? a) One b) Two c) Three d) Four e) None of these

Directions (Q. 12-16) Read the following information carefully to answer the given questions. Eight persons from different banks viz., Bank of India, Punjab National Bank, Canara Bank, Bank of Baroda, Oriental Bank of Commerce, Dena Bank, 77

REASONING MADE EASY


Union Bank of India and Bank of Maharashtra are sitting in two parallel rows containing four people each, in such a way that there is an equal distance between adjacent persons. The names of these persons are A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H. Each members seated in a row faces another member of the other row. (All the information given above does not necessarily represents the order of seating as in the final arrangement) A faces north and seated second to the left of the person, who is from Punjab National Bank. The person from Oriental Bank of Commerce is opposite to one who is second to the left of H. The person from Bank of Baroda is not near to H and F and not at the end of the row. The person from Canara Bank is opposite to the person who is from Dena Bank. The person from Bank of India is not at the end of the row but left of the person who is from Canara Bank. D is immediately right of the person who is from Bank of Maharashtra. The person from Canara Bank faces north while D faces south and opposite to B. The person from Union Bank of India is not opposite to E. The person from Canara Bank is opposite to C. •

•

•

•

12.

Which of the following is true regarding E? a) The person from Bank of Maharashtra faces E b) The person from Dena Bank is an immediate neighbour of E c) The person who is second to the right of G faces E d) E is from Union Bank of India e) E sits at one of the extreme end of the row

13.

Who is seated between G and the person from Bank of Maharashtra? a) The person from Bank of Baroda b) H c) F d) E e) The person from Dena Bank

14.

Who amongst the following sit at extrememe end of the row? a) A and the person from Bank of Maharashtra b) The person from Punjab National Bank and Union Bank of India c) The person from Dena Bank and E d) The person from Union Bank of India and C e) G and B

15.

Who amongst the following faces the person from Bank of Baroda? a) The person from Bank of India b) F c) A 78

REASONING MADE EASY


d) The person from Union Bank of India e) The person from Oriental Bank of Commerce 16.

B’ is related to Dena Bank’ in the same way as F’ is related to Bank of Baorda’ on the given arrangement, who amongst the following is G’ related to following the same pattern? a) Oriental Bank of Commerce b) Punjab National Bank c) Bank of India d) Canara Bank e) Union Bank of India

17.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on the given seating arrangement and thus form a group, which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) Canara Bank b) C c) Union Bank of India d) Oriental Bank of Commerce e) Bank of Maharashtra

18.

G is from which of the following banks? a) Oriental Bank of Commerce b) Dena Bank c) Bank of Maharashtra d) Canara Bank e) Punjab National Bank

19.

Who amongst the following is from Punjab National Bank? a) E b) H c) G d) C e) None of these

Directions (Q. 20-26) Study the following information carefully to answer the questions that follows. Eight persons namely A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H are sitting in a straight line from East to West. Some are facing North direction and some are facing South direction. H sits to the third left of C and faces south. F is sitting at one of the extreme ends and is facing north. B and G are facing in same direction and person sitting between them is facing in opposite direction. A is sitting third from left end and is facing South direction. A is sitting adjacent to E and both are facing in opposite direction. D is sitting to the right of B and both are facing in same direction. C is facing in North direction. A and D are not neighbours. Neighbors of H are facing in same direction which is opposite to the direction of H is facing. E sits to the right of A. 79

REASONING MADE EASY

20.


Who is sitting between A and H? a) F b) E b) B e) None of these

c) G

21.

Which of the following pairs has the person facing the same direction? a) E, A b) G, H c) A, G d) H, D e) B, D

22.

How many persons are facing in North direction? a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5 e) 6

23.

Who is sitting third from the eastern end of the arrangement? a) E b) G c) B d) C e) None of these

24.

How many persons are sitting between E and B? a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5 e) 6

25.

Which one of the following statement is correct? a) A sits between G and B b) D sits to thesecond left of H c) H and B are facing same direction d) Person sitting to the left of A faces direction e) All of the above

26.

Who sits 3rd to the left of A? a) B b) D d) G e) None of these

c) H

Directions (Q. 27-31) Study the following information and answer the question given below. Eight people E, F, G, H, J, K, L and M are sitting around a circular table facing the centre. Each of them is of a different professio n Chartered Accountant, Colomnist, Doctor, Engineer, Financial Analyst, Lawyer, Professor and Scientist but not necessarily in the same order. F is sitting second to the left of K. The Scientist is an immediate neighbour of K. There are only three people between the Scientist and E. Only one person sits between the Engineer and E. The Coloumnist is to t he immediate r ight of the Engineer. M is second to the right of K. H is the Scientist. G and J are immediate neighbours of each other. Neither G nor J is an Engineer. The Financjial Analyst is to the immediate left of F. The Lawyer is second to the right of the Coloumnist. The Professor is an immediate neighbour of the Engineer. G is second to the right of the Chartered Accountant. 80

REASONING MADE EASY


27.

Who is sitting second to the right of E? a) The Lawyer b) G c) The Engineer d) F e) K

28.

Who amongst the following is the Professor? a) F b) L d) K e) None of these

c) M

29.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on the given arrangement and hence from a group. Which of the following does not belong to that group? a) Chartered Accountant b) M – Doctor c) J – Engineer d) Financial Analyst – L e) Lawyer - K

30.

What is the position of L with respect to the Scientist? a) Third to the left b) Second to the right c) Second to the left d) Third to the right e) Immediate right

31.

Which of the following statements is true according to the given arrangement? a) The Lawyer is second to the left of the Doctor b) E is an immediate neighbour of the Financial Analyst c) H sits exactly between F and the Financial Analyst d) Only four people sit between the Coloumnist and F e) All of the given statements are true

Directions (Q. 32-36) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions:D, E, F, H and I are seated in a circle facing the centre. A, B and C are also seated in the same circle but two of them are not facing the centre. F is second to the left of C. E is third to the right of A. B is third to left of D, who is immediate neighbor of H and I. C is second to the right of D and third to the right of B. 32.

Which of the following pairs is not facing the centre? a) BC b) AC c) CA d) BD e) None of these

33.

What is the position of D with respect to F? 81

REASONING MADE EASY


a) Second to the right b) Third to the left c) Fifth to the right d) Cannot be determined e) None of these 34.

Who among the following is second to the left of B? a) A b) H c) I d) Either H or I e) None of these

35.

If H is on the immediate right of E then what is H’s position with respect to C? a) Third to the left b) Third to the right c) Fifth to the left d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

36.

Which of the following is/are the possible position(s) of I with respect to A? a) Fourth to the right b) Second to the left c) Fourth to the left d) Only a and c e) All of the above

Directions (Q. 37-41) Study the following information and answer the questions that follow: Eight students A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H in a school sports competition participated in a game in which they were sitting around a circulating. The seats of the ring are not directed towards the centre. All the eight students are in four groups I, II, IIII and IV, i.e two students in each group, but not necessarily in the same order. These students are from different sport houses, viz. Maharishi Vyas, Aryabhatt, Vashistha, Shankaracharya, Balmiki, Dhruv and Dayanand. •

• •

•

• •

No two students of the same group are sitting adjacent to each other except those of group III. Students from group IV are sitting opposite each other. D is neither in Dayanand nor in Aryabhatt house. The student from Dhruv house is sitting on the immediate right of the students from Dayanand house. C, who is in Vashistha house, is in group I. She is sitting on the immediate right of F, who is in group III. F is not in Aryabhatt house and she has also participated in other sports. B from Vyas house is neither in group IV nor in group I or II.

82

REASONING MADE EASY

•

•

37.

38.


B is sitting opposite E. Only Balmiki participant A is sitting b etween Dhruv participaint E and t he Shankaracharya participant. Both the students of group II are sitting adjacent to students of group IV. Who is in Maharishi house? a) G b) F d) Can’t say e) None of these

c) H

H’ is in which house? a) Dayanand b) Shankaracharya d) Can’t say e) None of these

c) Maharishi

39.

Who among the following students are in group IV? a) A and B b) A and C c) G and H d) Data inadequate e) None of these

40.

The student from which house is sitting opposite the Vashistha house participant? a) Dayanand b) Shankracharya c) Maharishi d) Can’t say e) None of these

41.

Which of the following statements is false? a) The Balmiki representative is sitting opposite the Maharishi house representative b) The Vyas house representative is sitting opposite the Dhruv house representative c) H and G are sitting opposite each other d) The two girl participants are sitting opposite each other e) None of these

Directions (Q. 42-46) Read the following information carefully and answer the questioins that follow. Twelve friends are sitting in two squares. One square is inside another. P, Q, R, S, T and V are in the outer square facing inward. A, B, C, D, E and F are sitting in the inner square facing outward. They all are s itting in such a way that in each square four persons are sitting in the middle of the sides and two persons are sitting on diagonally opposite corners. Each friend in the inner square is facing another friend of the outer square. There are exactly two persons sitting between P and T. E si ts second to the left of A. R is on the immediate left of the one who is f aci ng A. Neither E nor A faces either T or P. S is facing F and Q is not opposite R in the outer square. T is not sitting adjacent to S. B is not facing P. Between B and D there are as many persons as between R and V. 42.

Who is sitting opposite B? 83

REASONING MADE EASY

a) V d) Data inadequate 43.

44.

b) Q e) None of these


c) T

V is facing which of the following persons? a) E b) D d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) A

Who is sitting on the immediate left of R? a) A b) S d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) P

45.

Four of the five are alike in a certain manner. Select the one which is not similar to the other four. a) R, E b) A, S c) D, T d) F, Q e) C, E

46.

Who is sitting second to the left of D? a) A b) E d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) F

Directions (Q. 47-51) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions: E, F, G, H, I, J, K and L are eight feiends sitting around a circle facing the centre, but not necessarily in the same order. I is second to the left of F, who is next to the right of L. J is not the neighbour of F or K, and is on the immediate left of H. 47.

Which of the following pairs represents the neighbours of G? a) H, F b) E, H c) J, K d) I, E e) None of these

48.

Who among the following is on the immediate left of J? a) K b) H c) I d) L e) None of these

49.

Who among the following is on the immediate right of E? a) F b) L c) G d) H e) None of these

50.

Which of the following statements is true with respect to H? a) Immediate left of J b) Opposite L c) Second to the right of F d) All are true 84

REASONING MADE EASY


e) None of these 51.

How many persons sit between G and I? a) None b) One d) Three e) None of these

c) Two

Directions (Q. 52-56) Study the given information carefully and answer the given questiions. Eight people – A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H are sitting around a circular table facing the centre, not necessarily in the same order. Three people are sitting between A and D. B is sitting second to the right of A. C is to the immediate right of F. D is not an immediate neighbour of either F or E. H is not an immediate neighbour of B. 52.

What is E’s position with respect to G? a) Third to the left b) Second to the right c) Third to the right d) Second to the left e) None of these

53.

Four of the following are based on ab ove arrangement and so form a group. Which one does not belong to the group? a) GE b) DC c) AF d) AB e) CE

54.

Who is sitting third to the right of the one who is sitting to the immediate right of H? a) A b) B c) E d) C e) G

55. Which of the following is true regarding the given arrangement? a) E is second to the left of C b) B is an immediate neighbour of G c) H is an immediate neighbour of A d) D is not an immediate neighbour of H e) None of these 56.

How many people are sitting between H and A when counted from the right side of H? a) Three b) None c) More than three d) One e) Two

85

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 57-61) Study the following Information to answert these questions. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

P, Q, R, S, T, U and V are sitting along the circle facing the centre. T is 2nd to t he left of P. R is 3rd to the right of U who is the immediate left of V. Q is between P and S.

57.

Which of the following is true statement? a) P is between Q and T b) R is between P and V c) P is 4th to the right of U d) U is between V and Q e) None of these

58.

Which of the following pairs has its second member sitting to the immediate left of first member? a) VT b) PQ c) SU d) UV e) None of these

59.

Which of the following is the false statement? a) R is to the immediate left of P b) V is to the immediate right of T c) R is 4th to the right of S d) T is between V and R e) None of these

60.

What is the position of S? a) To the immediate left of U b) Between V and Q rd c) 3 to the right of T d) To the immediate right of P e) None of these

61.

Which of the following pairs has members sitting adjacent to each other? a) PS b) QU c) UT d) TR e) None of these

Directions (Q. 62-66) Study the following information and answer the questions which follow. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

K, L, M, N, O, P and Q are sitting around a circular table facing the centre. L sits between N and O. K is third to the left of O. Q is second to the left of M, who is to the immediate left of P. 86

REASONING MADE EASY


62.

Which is the correct position of L with respect to Q? a) Second to the right b) First to the left c) First to the right d) Third to the right e) None of these

63.

Which of the following pairs has the first person sitting to the immediate left of the second person? a) LO b) MK c) QN d) LN e) None of these

64.

Who sits second to the left of L? a) P b) M d) Q e) None of these

c) K

Who sits between M and Q? a) O b) N d) L e) None of these

c) K

65.

66.

Which of the following has the middle person sitting between the other two? a) NQL b) PMK c) MOP d) POK e) None of these

Directions (Q. 67-72) Study the follow ing information carefully and answer the questions given below. A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H are sitting around a circle facing at the centre. B is second to the right of H and third to the left of A. D is not an immediate neighbuor of either B or H and is second to the right of F. C is fourth to the right of G. 67.

If E and F interchange their places, who will be second to the right of B? a) F b) C c) D d) Data inadequate e) None of these

68.

In which of the following pairs is the second person sitting to the immediate left of the first person? a) BC b) HE c) FA d) GD e) None of these

69.

Who is 4th to the right of H? a) B d) Data inade quate

b) A e) None of these

c) F 87

REASONING MADE EASY

70.

71.


Who is to the immediate right of B? a) C b) E d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) H

Who is third to the right of E? a) C d) Data inadequate

c) D

b) F e) None of these

In a row of 45 boys facing South, T is 8th to the right of H, who is 10th from the right end. H is 14 th to the left of R. What is R’s position from the left end? a) 21st b) 23rd c) 24th d) Data inadequate e) None of these

72.

Directions (Q. 73-78) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below: P, M, D, A, F, H, R and B are sitting around a circle facing at the centre. R is 4 to the right of A, who is 3rd to the right of P. M is second t o the l eft of H, who is 2nd to the left of P. D is 3rd to the right of B. th

73.

Who is 3rd to the left of H? a) M b) A d) F e) Data inadequate

c) B

74.

Which of the following pairs represents the immediate neighbours of B? a) FM b) AP c) MP d) AF e) None of these

75.

If R and B interchange their positions, who will be 2 to the left of M? a) B b) H c) P d) Data inadequate e) None of these

76.

Who is the immediate right of P? a) F b) R d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) B

Who is the immediate right of M? a) H b) A d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) D

77.

78.

nd

th

In a row of 40 children, Q is 14 from the left end and there are 16 children between Q and M. What is M’s position from the right end of the row? a) 11th b) 10th c) 30th d) Data inadequate e) None of these 88

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 79-83) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. B, D, M, K, P, Q, W and H are sitting around a circle facing at the centre. M is to the immediate right of B who is 4th to the right of K. P is 2 nd to the left of B and is 4th to the right of W. Q is 2nd to the right of D who is 2 nd to the right of H. Who is 3rd to the right of B? a) W b) M d) H e) None of these

79.

c) K

80.

Which of the following represents the immediate neighbours of D? a) PQ b) KH c) PH d) KQ e) PK

81.

Who is 3rd to the right of W? a) P b) D d) R e) Data inadequate

c) K

Who is 2nd to the left of P? a) D b) H d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) K

Who is to the immediate left of B? a) Q b) P d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) W

82.

83.

Directions (Q. 84-88) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. A, M, D, P, R, T, B and H are sitting around a circle facing at the centre. M is 3 to the left of Awho is 2nd to the left of T. D is 2nd to the right of H who is 2 nd to the right of T. R is 2nd to the right of B who is not an immediate neighbour of T. rd

84.

Which of the following combinations represents the first and the second to the left of B respectively? a) MD b) DH c) AM d) AR e) DM

85.

Who is 3rd to the right of T? a) D b) B d) M e) None of these

86.

Who is to the immediate left of H? a) P b) M

c) H

c) T 89

REASONING MADE EASY

d) R 87.

88.


e) Data inadequate

Who is 2nd to the left of B? a) D b) H d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) M

In which of the following combinations 3rd person is 2nd to the left of 2nd person? a) BAR b) DBM c) TPH d) PMH e) None of these

Directions (Q. 89-93) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below 10 people are sitting in two parallel rows containing five people each, in such a way that there is an eaual distance between adjacent people. In row-1, Q, R, S, T and U are seated and all of them are facing north. In Row-2, L, M, N, O and P are seated and all of them are facing south. Therefore in the given sitting arrangement each member seated in a row faces another member of the other row. S is sitting 2nd to the left of Q. Q is not sitting at any of the ends of the line. There are two persons between P and L. The person who faces T is to the immediately left of M. M is sitting at the extreme right end. Q is an immediate neighbour of U. The person who faces U is an immediate neighbour of both P and N. 89.

Who among the following is sitting 2 nd to the right of O? a) P b) M c) L d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

90.

Who among the following sits exactly between Q and S? a) T b) U c) R d) There is no person between Q and S e) Cannot be determined

91.

Who among the following is sitting at the extreme right end of the Row-1? a) Q b) U c) S d) R e) Cannot be detrmined

92.

Which of the following statements is true regarding R? a) R is at the extreme left end of the row b) R is an immediate neighbour of U c) R is sitting second to the right of T d) R is sitting exactly between T and U 90



e) There two persons between R and S 93. 93.

Who amon Who among g the the foll follow owin ing g is is not not seat seated ed at any any ext extre reme me end end of of RowRow-1 1 and and Row-2? a) P b) S c) M d) R e) O

Directions (Q. 94-98) 94-98) Study the following information information carefully carefully and answer the questions given below 8 persons – E, F, G, H, H, I, J, K and L - are sitt sittin ing g arou around nd a circ circle le at at equidistance equidistance but not necessarily in the t he same order. Some of them are facing towards the centre while some others are facing outside the centre. L is sitting 3 rd to the left of K. Both K and L are facing towards the outside. H is not an immediate neighbour of K or L. J faces the just opposite opposite direction direction of H. (It implies implies that if H is facing towards the centre, centre, J would face face outside the the centre). J is sitting 2nd to the left of H. Both the immediate neighbours of G face just opposite direction of G. E is an immediate neighbour neighbour of K. Both the immediate immediate neighbour neighbour of H faces just opposite opposite direction of H. E faces towards t owards the centre and he is an immediate n eighbour of both K and and I. I. I face towards towards the centre. centre. 94. 94.

Who amo Who among ngst st the the fol follo lowi wing ng are are not not facin facing g tow towar ards ds the the cen centr tre? e? a) E, F and I b) F, G and J c) H, K and L d) G, I and J e) None of these

95.

What is the the pos posit itio ion n of of G with ith re respect ect to to E? E? nd a) 2 to the left b) 3rd to the right c) 4th to the left d) 2nd to the right th e) 5 to the right

96. 96.

Who amo Who among ng the the fol follo lowi wing ng is sitt sittin ing g exac exactly tly betw betwee een n F and and K? K? a) J b) I c) E d) G e) None of these

97. 97.

How How man many y per perso sons ns are are sit sitti ting ng betw betwee een n H and and K if we move ove clo clock ckwi wise se starting from H? a) Three b) Four c) Five d) Two e) One

98. 98.

Which Whic h of the the fol follo lowi wing ng sta state teme ment ntss is not not tru truee rega regard rdin ing g the the give given n sitt sittin ing g arrangement? a) L is sitting sitting exactly between between G and and I rd b) H is sitting 3 to the right of K c) F and I are sitting just opposite to each other 91



d) E is sitting 3 rd to the left of G e) All are true

Directions (Q. 99-103) 99-103) Study the following following information information carefully and and answer the questions. A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H are sitting around a circle, facing the centre. A sits fourth to the right of H while second to the left of F. C is not the neighbour of F and B. D sits third to the right of C. H never sits next to G. 99. 99.

Who am Who amongs ongstt the the foll follow owin ing g sits sits betw betwee een n B and and D? D? a) G b) F c) H d) A e) C

100. 100.

Which Whic h of of the the foll follow owin ing g pai pairs rs sit sit bet betwe ween en H and and G? a) BH b) EF c) CE d) DB e) None of these

101. 101.

Four Four of the the follo followin wing g are are alike alike I n a cert certain ain way based based on on their their pos positi ition onss in the sitting arrangement and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) AE b) HF c) BD d) GE e) CH

102.

Who is is im immedia ediate te rig right of A? A? a) C b) D d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) G

Who sit Who sitss sec secon ond d to the the rig right of B? a) A b) C d) E e) None of these

c) D

103. 103.

Directions (Q. 104-108) 104-108) Study the following following carefully and answer answer the questions. A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H are sitting around a circle, facing the centre. E and G always sit next to each other. D sits third to the right of C. F sits to the left of H. C never sits next to A while D never sits next to G. H is not the neighbour of D and C. 104. 104.

105. 105.

Who sit Who sitss to to imm immedia ediate te rig right of F? a) D b) C d) A e) None of these

c) B

Four Four of the follow following ing are alik alikee in a certai certain n way way based based on thei theirr posit position ionss in the sitting arrangement and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong belong to that group group?? 92


a) CH d) DG

b) BA e) AC


c) FE

106. 106.

Which Whic h of the the foll follow owin ing g pai pairs rs sit sitss bet betwe ween en B and and F? F? a) HB b) FD c) BG d) GC e) AH

107. 107.

Who sits Who its seco second nd to the the left left of B? a) F b) G d) E e) None of these

c) A

Who si sits be between A and D? D? a) B b) F d) E e) None of these

c) C

108.

Directions (Q. (Q. 109-113) 109-113) Study the following following information information carefully carefully to answer these questions. Ashwini, Priya, Sudha, Rani, Meeta, Geeta and Mukta are sitting around a circle facing the centre. Ashwini is third to the left of Mukta and to the immediate right o f Rani. Priya is second to the left of Geeta who is not an immediate neighbour of Meeta. 109. 109.

110. 110.

Who is Who is to to the the imm immedia ediate te rig right ht of Priy Priya? a? a) Meeta b) Sudha d) Cannot be determined e) None of the above Who is Who is sec secon ond d to the the left left of Rani Rani?? a) Ashwini b) Meeta d) Sudha e) None of these

c) Mukta

c) Priya

111. 111.

Which of Which of the fol follow lowing ing pairs pairs of pers person onss has the firs firstt person person sittin sitting g to the the immediate left of second person? a) Rani-Meeta b) Ashwini-Geeta c) Sudha-Priya d) Geeta-Sudha e) None of these

112. 112.

Which of Which of the follow following ing group groupss has the firs firstt perso person n sitti sitting ng betw between een the the othe otherr two? a) Meeta-Ashwini-Geeta Meeta-Ashwini-Geeta b) Sudha-Rani-Geeta Sudha-Rani-Geeta c) Mukta-Priya-Rani d) Mukta-Priya-Sudha e) None of these

113. 113.

Which Whic h of the the foll follow owin ing g is is the the corre correct ct pos posit itio ion n of of Rani Rani wit with h resp respec ectt to Mukta? 93


i) Third to the right ii) Third to the left iii) Fourth to the left iv) Fourth to the right a) i) only d) Both ii) and iv)


b) ii) only e) Both i) and iii)

c) Both i) and ii)

Directions (Q. (Q. 114-118) 114-118) Study the following following information information carefully carefully to answer these questions. A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H are sitting around a circle facing the centre. F is third to the right of C and second to the left of H. D is not an immediate neighbour of C or H. E is to the immediate right right of A, who is second to the right of of G. 114.

115. 115.

Who is is se secon cond to the the le left of C? C? a) A b) B d) D e) None of these

c) E

Who is Who is to to the the imm immedia ediate te righ rightt of of C? C? a) A b) B d) B or D e) None of these

c) D

116. 116.

Which of the Which the foll follow owing ing pairs pairs of of perso persons ns has first first pers person on sitt sitting ing to the the righ rightt of the second person? a) CB b) AE c) FG d) HA e) DB

117.

Who si sits be between G and D? D? a) H b) D d) E e) None of these

118. 118.

c) F

Which of the Which the fol follow lowing ing is the the corr correct ect posi positio tion n of B with with resp respect ect to to H? I. Second to the right II. Fourth to the ri ght III. Fourth to the left IV. Second to the left a) Only I b) Only II c) Only III d) Both II and III e) None of these

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Option D Option E Option A Option B Option B 94


6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51.


Option A Option D Option D Option B Option C Option A Option B Option A Option D Option A Option B Option E Option A Option B Option C Option E Option E Option C Option B Option B Option A Option B Option D Option C Option B Option A Option A Option E Option D Option B Option E Option B Option D Option C Option B Option D Option C Option A Option C Option E Option A Option B Option A Option C Option B Option D 95

REASONING MADE EASY

52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89.


Option D Option B Option C Option B Option C Option C Option E Option B Option A Option D Option E Option D Option A Option C Option B Option E Option D Option C Option A Option B Option E Option B Option D Option E Option A Option C Option A Option D Option E Option B Option C Option A Option E Option D Option A Option C Option B Option C L is sitting 2nd to the right of O.

90.

Option A T sits exactly between Q and S.

91.

Option D 96

REASONING MADE EASY


R is sitting at the extreme right end of the Row-1. 92.

Option B R is at the extreme right end. R is to the immediate right of U. R is sitting third to the right of T. R is at one of the ends. There are three persons – T, Q and U – between R and S

93.

Option E O is second from the left in Row-2.

94.

Option C H, K and L are facing outside.

95.

Option D E is facing t owards the centre. G is 2nd to the right or 5th to the left of E. 97

REASONING MADE EASY

96.


Option A J is sitting exactly between F and K.

97.

Option B There are four persons – G, L, I and E – between H and K if we move clockwise from H.

98.

Option E All the statements are true.

99. 100. 101. 102. 103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116. 117. 118.

Option B Option C Option A Option B Option D Option D Option E Option E Option C Option B Option C Option E Option D Option B Option E Option A Option B Option E Option C Option D

98

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter - 5 Syllogisms Directions (Q. 1-5) In each of the questions below are given three statements followed by two conclusions numbered I and II. You have to take the given statements to be true even if they seem to be at variance withcommonly known facts. Read all the conclusions and then decide which of the given conclusions logically follows from the given statements disregarding commonly known facts. Give answer: a) If only conclusion I follows b) If only conclusion II follows c) If either conclusion I or II follows d) If neither conclusion I nor II follows e) If both conclusions I and II follow 1.

2.

3.

4.

Statements:

All benches are cots. No cot is lamp. Some lamps are candles.

Conclusions:

I. Some cots are benches. II. Some candles are cots.

Statements:

Some cats are dogs. All dogs are goats. All goats are walls.

Conclusions:

I. Some walls are dogs. II. Some walls are cats.

Statements:

Some buildings are sofas. Some sofas are benches. Some benches are tables.

Conclusions:

I. Some tables are sofas. II. No table is sofa.

Statements:

All rats are bats. Some bats are desks. All desks are chairs.

Conclusions:

I. Some desks are rats. 99

REASONING MADE EASY


II. Some chairs are rats. 5.

Statements:

Some roads are ponds. All ponds are stores. Some stores are bags.

Conclusions:

I. Some bags are ponds. II. Some stores are roads.

Directions (Q. 6-11) In each question below are four statements followed by four conc lusions numbered I, II, III and IV. You have to take the four given statements to be true even if they seem to be at variance from commonly known facts and than decide which of the given conclusions logically follows from the four given statements disregarding commonly known facts. Then decide which of the answers a, b, c, d and e is correct answer. 6.

Statements:

All belts are rollers. Some rollers are wheels. All wheels are mats. Some mats are cars.

Conclusions:

I. Some mats are rollers. II. Some mats are belts. III. Some cars are rollers. IV. Some rollers are belts.

a) Only I and II follow b) Only I, III and IV follow c) Only I and IV follow d) Only II, III and IV follow e) None of the above 7.

Statements:

Some tyres are rains. Some rains are flowers. All flowers are jungles. All jungles are tubes.

Conclusions:

I. Some jungles are tyres. II. Some tubes are rains. III. Some jungles are rains. IV. Some tubes are flowers.

a) Only I, II and III follow b) Only II, III and IV follow c) Only I, III and IV follow d) All follow e) None of the above 100

REASONING MADE EASY

8.


Statements:

All desks are chairs. All chairs are tables. All tables are boxes. All boxes are trunks.

Conclusions:

I. Some trunks are tables. II. All chairs are boxes. III. Some boxes are desks. IV. All desks are trunks.

a) Only I, II and III follow b) Only I, II and IV follow c) Only II, III and IV follow d) All follow e) None of the above 9.

Statements:

Some birds are goats. Some goats are horses. Some horses are lions. Some lions are tigers.

Conclusions:

I. Some tigers are goats. II. No tiger is goat. III. Some lions are birds. IV. No lion is bird.

a) Only either I or II follows b) Only either III or IV follows c) Only either I or II and either III or IV follow d) Only I and III follow e) None of the above 10.

Statements:

All papers are bottles. All bottles are cups. Some cups are jugs. Some jugs are plates.

Conclusions:

I. Some plates are cups. II. Some plates are bottles. III. Some cups are papers. IV. Some bottles are papers.

a) Only III and IV follow b) Only I and II follow c) Only I and II follow d) Only II and IV follow e) None of the above 11.

Statements:

All bulbs are wires. 101

REASONING MADE EASY


No wire is cable. Some cables are brushes. All brushes are paints. Conclusions:

I. Some paints are cables. II. Some wires are bulbs. III. Some brushes are wires. IV. Some cables are bulbs.

a) None follows b) Only I and II follow c) Only II follows d) Only III follows e) Only IV follows

Directions (Q. 12-16) In each of the questions below are given four statements followed by three conclusions numbered I, II and III. You have to take the given statements to be true even if they seem to be at variance from commonly known facts. Read all the conclusions and then decide which of the given conclusions logically follows from the given statements disregarding commonly known facts. 12.

Statements:

All booklets are packets. All packets are bottles. Some bottles are cans. Some cans are pitchers.

Conclusions:

I. Some pitchers are bottles. II. Some cans are packets. III. Some bottles are booklets.

a) None follows b) Only I follow c) Only II follows d) Only III follows e) Only II and III follow

13.

Statements:

Some ropes are walls. Some walls are sticks. All sticks are chairs. All chairs are tables.

Conclusions:

I. Some tables are walls. II. Some chairs are ropes. III. Some sticks are ropes.

a) None follows b) Only I follows c) Only II follows 102

REASONING MADE EASY


d) Only III follows e) Only II and III follow

14.

Statements:

Some rivers are jungles. Some jungles are horses. Some horses are tents. Some tents are buildings.

Conclusions:

I. Some buildings are horses. II. Some tents are jungles. III. Some horses are rivers.

a) None follows b) Only I follows c) Only II follows d) Only III follows e) Only I and II follow

15.

Statements:

Some pens are knives. All knives are pins. Some pins are needles. All needles are chains.

Conclusions:

I. Some chains are pins. II. Some needles are knives. III. Some pins are pens.

a) Only I follows b) Only II follows c) Only III follows d) Only II and III follow e) None of these

16.

Statements:

All fields are ponds. No pond is tree. Some trees are huts. All huts are goats.

Conclusions:

I. Some goats are fields. II. No goat is field. III. Some goats are trees.

a) Only I follows b) Only II follows c) Only III follows d) Only eithr I or II follows e) Only either I or II and III follow

103

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 17-28) In each of the questions below are given three statements followed by three conclusions numbered I, II and III. You have to take the given statements to be true even if they seem to be at vari ance from commonly known facts. Read all the conclusions and then decide which of the given conclusions logically follow from the given statements disregarding commonly known facts. 17.

Statements:

All books are tents. Some tents are lakes. All lakes are ponds.

Conclusions:

I. Some ponds are books. II. Some ponds are tents. III. Some lakes are books.

a) None follows b) Only I follows c) Only II follows d) Only III follows e) Only II and III follow

18.

Statements:

Conclusions:

All pictures are walls. Some walls are rooms. Some rooms are windows. I. Some windows are walls. II. Some windows are pictures. III. Some rooms are walls.


19.

Statements:

All baskets are marbles. Some marbles are sticks. No stick is garden.

Conclusions:

I. Some gardens are baskets. II. Some sticks are baskets. III. No garden is baskets.

a) Only I follows b) Only III follows c) Only either I or III follows d) Only II follows e) None of the above

20.

Statements:

Some bulbs are tubes. 104

REASONING MADE EASY


Some tubes are wires. Some wires are lamps.

Conclusions:

I. Some lamps are tubes. II. Some wires are bulbs. III. Some lamps are bulbs.

a) None follows b) Only III follows c) Only II follows d) Only I follows e) Only I and II follow

21.

Statements:

All buildings are rivers. All rivers are jungles. All jungles are mountains.

Conclusions:

I. Some mountains are rivers. II. Some jungles are buildings. III. Some mountains are buildings.

a) Only I and II follow b) Only I and III follow c) Only II and III follow d) All I, II and III follow e) None of the above

22.

Statements:

All chairs are keys. All keys are baloons. Some balloons are mirrors. Some mirrors are desks.

Conclusions:

I. Some desks are keys. II. Some balloons are chairs. III. Some mirrors are balloons.

a) Only I follows b) Only II follows c) Only III follows d) Only II and III follow e) All I, II and III follow

23.

Statements:

Some drums are posters. All posters are windows. Some windows are tablets. All tablets are books.

Conclusions:

I. Some windows are drums. II. Some books are posters. 105

REASONING MADE EASY


III. Some tablets are drums. a) None follows b) Only I follow c) Only II follows d) Only III follows e) Only I and II follow

24.

Statements:

Some boxes are toys. Some toys are nails. Some nails are stores. Some stores are shops.

Conclusions:

I. Some nails are boxes. II. Some toys are shops. III. No nail is box.

a) Only I follows b) Only III follows c) Only either I or III follows d) Only II follows e) None of the above

25.

Statements:

All doors are windows. No window is house. Some houses are buildings. All buildings are skies.

Conclusions:

I. Some skies are doors. II. Some skies are houses. III. Some buildings are doors.

a) Only I follows b) Only II follows c) Only III follows d) Only II and III follow e) None of these

26.

Statements:

All rivers are walls. All walls are stones. All stones are clothes. All clothes are trees.

Conclusions:

I. Some trees are stones. II. Some clothes are rivers. III. All walls are clothes.

a) Only I and II follow b) Only I and III follow c) Only II and III follow 106

REASONING MADE EASY


d) All I, II and III follow e) None of the above

27.

Statements:

Some letters are glasses. Some glasses are plates. All plates are buses. All buses are cars.

Conclusions:

I. Some cars are letters. II. Some cars are glasses. III. Some buses are glasses.

a) Only I and II follow b) Only I and III follow c) Only II follows d) Only III follows e) Only II and III follow

28.

Statements:

All books are pens. Some pens are ropes. All ropes are discs. Some discs are bricks.

Conclusions:

I. Some bricks are ropes. II. Some discs are books. III. Some bricks are pens.


Directions (Q. 29-34) In each of the questions below are given four statements followed by four conclusions number I, II, III and IV. You have to take the given statements to be true even if they seem to be of variance from commonly known facts. Read all the conclusions and then decide which of the given conclusions logically follows from the given statements disregarding commonly known facts. 29.

Statements:

Some robots are machines. Some computers are both robots and machines. Some animals are machines. Some toys are animals.

Conclusions:

I. Some toys are robots. II. Some toys are machines. 107

REASONING MADE EASY


III. Some animals are computers. IV. Some robots are not toys. a) None follows b) Only II and III follow c) Only I and III follow d) Only III follows e) Only either I or IV follows 30.

Statements:

All suns are stars. All moons are stars. Some planets are suns. Some stars are gases.

Conclusions:

I. Some starts are planets. II. Some suns are gases. III. No moon is a planet. IV. Some gases are moons.

a) None follows b) Only I follows c) Only I and II follows d) Only III and IV follow e) Only I and III follow 31.

Statements:

All books are diaries. Some diaries are pens. Some pens are drawers. All drawers are chairs.

Conclusions:

I. Some drawers are diaries. II. Some chairs are pens. III. Some pens are books. IV. Some diaries are books.

a) None follows b) Only II follows c) Only II and III follow d) Only II and IV follow e) All follow 32.

Statements:

Some buildings are rivers. Some mountains are both buildings and rivers. Some roads are buildings. All roads are trucks.

Conclusions:

I. Some mountains are roads. II.Some buildings are trucks. III.Some rivers are roads. 108

REASONING MADE EASY


IV. Some trucks are rivers. a) None follows b) Only I follows c) Only II follows d) Only III follows e) All follow 33.

Statements:

All tables are round. Some hills are round. Some rivers are hills. All rivers are conical.

Conclusions:

I. Some rivers are round. II. Some hills are conical. III. Some rivers are both hills and round. IV. Some tables are conical.

a) None follows b) Only II follows c) Only I and III follow d) Only II and III follow e) All follow 34.

Statements:

All sharks are fishes. Some fishes are birds. All birds are trees. All trees are insects.

Conclusions:

I. Some insects are sharks. II. Some sharks are trees. III. All insects are birds. IV. Some birds are sharks.

a) None follows b) Only II follows c) Only I and IV follow d) Only II and III follow e) All follow

Answers: 1. Option A

109

REASONING MADE EASY


So, only I follows. 2.

Option E

So, both I and II follow. 3.

Option C

110

REASONING MADE EASY


So, either I or II follows 4.

Option D

So, neither I nor II follows. 5.

Option B

111

REASONING MADE EASY


So, only II follows. 6.

Option C

Only I and IV follow 7.

Option B

112

REASONING MADE EASY


So, only II, III and IV follow 8.

Option D

All follows 9.

Option C

113

REASONING MADE EASY


So, either III or IV follow 10.

Option A

So, only III and IV follow 11.

Option B 114

REASONING MADE EASY


Only I and II follow. 12.

Option D

Only III follows. 13.

Option B

115

REASONING MADE EASY


Only I follows. 14.

Option A

None follows 15.

Option E

116

REASONING MADE EASY


Only I and III follow. 16.

Option E

Either I or II and III follow 17.

Option C

117

REASONING MADE EASY


So, only II follows 18.

Option D

Only III follows. 19.

Option C 118

REASONING MADE EASY


So, either I or III follows 20.

Option A

So, None follows 21.

Option D

119

REASONING MADE EASY


So, all I, II and III follow 22.

Option D

Only II and III follow.

120

REASONING MADE EASY

23.


Option B

Only I follows. 24.

Option C

Either I or III follows 25.

Option B

121

REASONING MADE EASY


Only II follows 26.

Option D

So, All I, II and III follow 27.

Option E 122

REASONING MADE EASY


Only II and III follow 28.

Option A

None follows 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34.

Option E Option B Option D Option C Option B Option A

123

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter - 6 Blood Relations 1.

R is sister of M who is brother of H. D is mother of K who is brother of M. How is R related to D? a) Sister b) Daughter c) Mother d) Data inadequate e) None of these

2.

K is brother of T. M is mother of K. W is brother of M. How is W related to T? a) Maternal uncle b) Paternal uncle c) Grandfather d) Data inadequate e) None of these

3.

Pointing to a woman, Nirmal said, “She is the daughter of my wife’s grandfather’s only child”. How is the women releated to Nirmal? a) Wife b) Sister-in-law c) Sister d) Data inadequate e) None of these

4.

D is brother of K. M is sister of K. T is father of R who is brother of M. F is mother of K. At least how many sons does T and F have? a) Two b) Three c) Four d) Data inadequate e) None of these

Directions (Q. 5-6) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below S has two daughters R and A. G is married to R. G is father of N. L is son of A. 5.

6.

How L is related to S? a) Nephew b) Brother d) Great Grandson e) None of these

c) Grandson

Which of the following statement is/are true on the basis of information given above? a) G is son-in-law of S b) R is wife of G c) A is mother of L d) L is cousin of N e) All are true 124

REASONING MADE EASY

7.


M is sister of K. D is brother of K. F is mother of M. How is K related to F? a) Son b) Daughter c) Son or Daughter d) Data inadequate e) None of the above

Directions (Q. 8-10) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions which follow: A × B’ means A is wife of B’ A + B’ means A is brother of B’ A ÷ B’ means A is daughter of B’ A ⎯ B’ means A is son of B’

8. How is Q related to P if P ÷ R × T ⎯ Q’? a) Granddaughter b) Mother-in-law/Father-in-law c) Grandmother d) Grandmother/Grandfather e) None of the above 9. How is R related to Q, if P ⎯ Q + R ÷ T’? a) Brother/Sister b) Niece d) Nephew/Niece e) None of these

c) Sister

10. How is T related to P if P × Q ⎯ T + R’? a) Mother b) Father-in-law c) Mother-in-law d) Mother-in-law/Father-in-law e) None of the above

Directions (Q. 11-15) Read the information carefully and answer the following questions. If A + B means A is the father of B. If A × B means A is the sister of B. If A $ B means A is the wife of B. If A % B means A is the mother of B. If A ÷ B means A is t he son of B. 11.

What should come in place of the question mark, to establish that J is the brother of T in the expression? J÷P%H?T%L a) x b) ÷ c) $ d) Either ÷ or x e) Either + or ÷

12.

Which among the given expressions indicate that M is the daughter of D? 125

REASONING MADE EASY


a) L % R $ D + T × M b) L + R $ D + M × T c) L % R % D + T ÷ M d) D + L $ R + M × T e) L $ D ÷ R % M ÷ T 13. Which among the f ollowing options is true, if thue expression I + T % J × L ÷ K’ is definitely true? a) L is the daughter of T b) K is the son-in-law of I c) I is the grandmother of L d) T is the father of J e) J is the brother of L 14. Which among the following expressions is true, if Y is the son of X is definitely false? a) W % L × T × Y ÷ X b) W + L × T × Y ÷ X c) X + L × T × Y ÷ W d) W $ X + L + Y + T e) W % X + T × Y ÷ L 15. What should come in place of the question mark, to establish that T is the sisterin-law of Q I n the expression? R%T×P?Q+V a) ÷ b) % c) × d) $ e) None of these

Directions (Q. 16-20) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions: There are eight family members- I, J, K, L, M, N, P and Q. J has only two children K and L. I is mother of K, who is sister of L. N is son of L. Q is brother of N. M is mother of Q. P is granddaughter of I. 16.

17.

18.

How is Q related to L? a) Mother d) Sister

b) Son e) None of these

c) Daughter

Who among the following is father of P? a) J b) L d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

c) N

How is M related to I? a) Son d) Cannot be determined

c) Daughter

b) Son-in-law e) None of these

126

REASONING MADE EASY

19.

20.


How many children does M have? a) One b) Two d) Either b or c e) None of these

c) Three

How is K related to M? a) Sister d) Mother-in-law

c) Sister-in-law

b) Daughter e) None of these

Directions (Q. 21-23) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions which follow. If A × B’ means A is father of B’. If A + B’ means A is wife of B’. If A ÷ B’ means A is daughter of B’. If A ⎯ B’ means A is son of B.

21.

How is L related to Q in the expression L ÷ M × O ⎯ P ÷ Q’? a) Granddaughter b) Niece c) Daughter-in-law d) Daughter e) cannot be determined

22.

What will come in the place of the question mark, to establish that Q is the nephew of T in the expression Q ? R ÷ S × T’? a) + b) × c) d) ÷ e) Either ⎯ or ÷

23.

Which of the following relations are true based upon the relations given in the equation: A ⎯ B × C + D ⎯ E’? a) C is mother of A b) E is wife of B c) D is brother of A d) E is mother-in-law of C e) None is true

Directions (Q. 24-26) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions below. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 24.

P × Q’ means P is brother of Q. P ⎯ Q’ means P is mother of Q’. P + Q’ means P is father of Q’. P ÷ Q’ means P is sister of Q’. Which of the following means M is niece of N ? a) M × R ⎯ N b) N ÷ J + M ÷ D d) N × J ⎯ M e) None of these

c) N ÷ J + M

127

REASONING MADE EASY


25.

Which of the following means B is grandfather of F’? a) B + J ⎯ F b) B ⎯ J + F d) B ÷ T + F e) None of these

26.

How is M related to K in the expression B + K ÷ T × M’? a) Son b) Daughter c) Son or daughter d) Data inadequate e) None of these

c) B × T ⎯ F

Directions (Q. 27-32) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions which follow: A × B’ means A is father of B’ A + B’ means A is daughter of B’ A ÷ B’ means A is mother of B’ A ⎯ B’ means A is brother of B’

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 27.

28.

If P ÷ R ⎯ Q × T’ how is P related to T? a) Grandmother b) Mother-in-law d) Grandfather e) None of these

c) Sister

If P ÷ Q + R × T’ how is T related to Q’? a) Aunt b) Sister d) Grandson e) None of these

c) Brother

29.

Which of the following means that R is wife of P? a) P × R ⎯ Q ⎯ T b) P ÷ T + R ⎯ Q c) P ÷ R ⎯ Q + T d) P × T ⎯ Q + R e) None of these

30.

If R ⎯ P ÷ J × Q’ how is J related to R? a) Son/daughter b) Nephew d) Grandson e) None of these

31.

32.

If P + Q ⎯ R ÷ T’, how is T related to P? a) Aunt b) Aunt/Uncle d) Grandmother e) None of these

c) Niece

c) Father

If P × T ÷ Q + R’ how is R related to P? a) Daughter b) Husband d) Son-in-law/Daughter-in-law e) None of the above

c) Son-in-law

Answers: 128

REASONING MADE EASY


1. 2. 3.

Option B Option A Option A Woman = daughter of Nirmal’s wife’s grandfather’s only child = daughter of Nirmal’s wife’s father = Nirmal’s wife

4. 5.

Option A Option C A is daughter of S. L is son of A. So, L is grandson of S.

6.

Option E All the statements are true. R is wife of G. R is daughter of S. So, G is sonin-law of S. L is son of A and A is daughter of S. So, A is mother of L. R and A are sisters. N is child of R and L is son of A. So, L is cousin of N.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.

Option C Option D Option E Option B Option A Option B Option B Option D Option D Option B Option B Option E Option C Option C Option A Option B Option E Option B Option A Option D Option A Option E Option D Option B Option E Option C

129

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 7 Analogy Directions (Q.1-9) In each of the following questions, select the related letter/word/number from the given alternatives. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lion : Forest : : Fish : ? a) Cage b) Nest d) Water e) None of these

c) Sky

Polio : Virus : : Anthrax : ? a) Fungus b) Bacteria d) Insect e) None of these

c) Virus

Money : Yenom : : Right : ? a) HTIRG b) THGIR d) IRGHT e) None of these

c) GIRHT

NIIOLUSL : ILLUSION : : TBERVARE : ? a) STRANGE b) VERTEBRA d) ERAVEBT e) None of these

c) VABTERE

RUST : 9687 : : TSUR : ? a) 7896 b) 7869 d) 6789 e) None of these

c) 7689

13 : 169 : : ? a) 12 : 140 d) 9 : 81

b) 3 : 6 e) None of these

c) 11 : 111

23 : 29 : : 41 : ? a) 43 d) 49


c) 47

6 : 10 : : 9 : ? a) 10 d) 18


c) 15

River : Tributary : : Tree : ? a) Stem b) Root d) Flower e) None of these

c) Branch

130

REASONING MADE EASY


Answers: 1.

Option D Forest is the habitat of Lion. Similarly, water body is the habitat of fish.

2.

Option B The causative organism of polio is virus. Similarly, the causative organism of anthrax is bacteria.

3.

Option B

4.

Option B From the jumbled letters NIIOLUSL, we can form the meaningful word ILLUSION. Similarly, we can form VERTEBRA from the jumbled letters TBERVARE.

5.

Option B R U 9 6 Similarly, T S 7 8

S 8

T 7

U 6

R 9

6.

Option D The relation is x : x square 13 × 13 = 169 Similarly, 9 × 9 = 81

7.

Option A Two consecutive prime numbers are given: 23 ⟶ 29 Similarly, 41 ⟶ 43

8.

Option C 2×3=6 2 × 5 = 10 Similarly, 3×3=9 3 × 5 = 15

9.

Option C Tributary is a part of river. Similarly, branch is a part of tree and is analogus to tributary in the case of river. 131

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter - 8 Coded Inequality Directions (Q. 1-5) In the following questions, the symbols @, ©, $, % and * are used with the following meanings as illustrated below. P © Q’ means P is not greater than Q’. P % Q’ means P is not smaller than Q’. P * Q’ means P is neither smaller than nor equal to Q’. P @ Q’ means P is neither greater than nor equal to Q’. P $ Q’ means P is neither greater than nor smaller than Q’. Now in each of the following questions, assuming the given statements to be true, find which of the two conclusions I and II given below them is/are definitely true.

Give answer: a) If only conclusion I is true. b) If only conclusion II is true. c) If either conclusion I or II is true. d) If neither conclusion I nor II is true. e) If both conclusions I and II are true. 1.


K @ V, V © N, N % F I. F @ V II. K @ N

2.


H © W, W $ M, M @ B I. B * H II. M % H

3.


D % B, B * T, T $ M I. T © D II. M © D

4.


M * T, T @ K, K © N I. N * T II. N * M

5.


R $ J, J % D, D * F I. D $ R II. D @ R

Directions (Q. 6-11) In the following questions, the symbols ©, @, $, % and * are used with following meanings as illustrated below. P % Q’ means P is not greater than Q’ 132

REASONING MADE EASY


P % Q’ means P is not smaller than Q’ P * Q’ means P is neither smaller than nor equal to Q’ P © Q’ means P is neither greater than nor equal to Q’ P $ Q’ means P is neither greater than nor smaller than Q’

In each question four statements showing relationship have been given, which are followed by four conclusions I, II, III and IV. Assuming that the given statements are true, find out which conclusion (s) is/are definitely true. 6.


M © D , D * K, K @ R, R * F I. F © K II. D * F III. M © R IV. D * R

a) None is true b) Only I is true c) Only II is true d) Only III is true e) Only IV is true 7.


B % K, K $ T, T * F, H © F I. B $ T II. T © B III. H © K IV. F © B

a) Only either I or II is true b) Only III is true c) Only IV is true d) Only III and IV are true e) Only either I or II and III and IV are true 8.


W * B, B @ F, F © R, R $ M I. W * F II. M * B III. R * B IV. M * W

a) Only I and IV are true b) Only II and III are true c) Only I and III are true d) Only II and IV are true e) None of the above 9.


E @ K, K $ T, T © N, B % N I. T % E II. K © N III. B * T 133

REASONING MADE EASY


IV. B * E a) Only I, II and III are true b) Only II, III and IV are true c) Only I, III and IV are true d) All are true e) None of the above 10.


Z $ B, B % M, M © F, F @ R I. Z * M II. F * B III. R * M IV. M @ Z

a) Only I and II are true b) Only I, III and IV are true c) Only III and IV are true d) Only either I or IV and III are true e) None of the above 11.


H @ T, T $ N, F © N, B % F I. F @ H II. F © T III. B * T IV. B % H

a) None is true b) Only I is true c) Only II is true d) Only II and IV are true e) Only II and III are true

Directions (Q. 12-16) In the following questions, the symbols ^, #, %, @ and * are used with the following meaning as illustrated below: P # Q’ means P is neither greater nor smaller than Q’. P ^ Q’ means P is not smaller than Q’. P @ Q’ means P is neither smaller than nor equal to Q’. P * Q’ means P is not greater than Q’. P % Q’ means P is neither greater than nor equal to Q’. Now in each of the following questions assuming the given statements to be true, find which of the three conclusions I, II and III given below them is/are definitely true and give your answer accordingly. 12.


D % F, F @ H, H * N I. N @ F II. D % N III. H % D

a) None is true 134

REASONING MADE EASY


b) Only I is true c) Only II is true d) Only III is true e) Only I and II are true 13.


B ^ D, D % T, T * M I. B @ T II. M @ D III. B @ M

a) Only I is true b) Only II is true c) Only III is true d) Only II and III are true e) None of these 14.


K # W, M @ W, R ^ M I. K % M II. W % R III. R @ K

a) Only I and II are true b) Only I and III are true c) Only II and III are true d) All I, II and III are true e) None of the above 15.


M @ K, K ^ T, T # J I. J # K II. M @ J III. J % K

a) Only I is true b) Only II is true c) Only III is true d) Only either I or III is true e) Only either I or III and II are true 16.


R * N, N % B, B # T I. B @ R II. T @ N III. R % T

a) Only I and II are true b) Only I and III are true c) Only II and III are true d) All I, II and III are true e) None of the above

135

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 17-21) In the following questions, the symbols @, ©, $, % and * are uses with the following meaning as illustrated below. P © Q’ means P is not smaller than Q’ P % Q’ means P is not greater than Q’ P * Q’ means P is neither smaller than nor equal to Q’. P @ Q’ means P is neither greater than nor smaller than Q’ P $ Q’ means P is neither greater than nor equal to Q’ Now in each of the following questions assuming the given statements to be true, find which of the conclusions I, II and III given below them is/are definitely true: 17.


F % T, T @ J, J * W I. J @ F II. J * F III. W $ T

a) Only I is true b) Only II is true c) Only III is true d) Only either I or II is true e) Only either I or II and III are true 18.


R * D, D © K, K $ M I. M * R II. K $ R III. D * M

a) None is true b) Only I is true c) Only II is true d) Only III is true e) Only II and III are true 19.


Z © F, F $ M, M % K I. K * F II. Z * M III. K * Z

a) Only I is true b) Only II is true c) Only III is true d) Only II and III are true e) None of the above 20.


H @ B, B © R, A $ R I. B * A II. R % H III. A $ H

a) Only I and II are true 136

REASONING MADE EASY


b) Only I and III are true c) Only II and III are true d) All I, II and III are true e) None of the above 21.


M $ J, J * T, K © T I. K * J II. M $ T III. M $ K

a) None is true b) Only I is true c) Only II is true d) Only III is true e) Only II and III are true

Directions (Q. 22-27) In the following questions, the symbols @, ©, #, $ and * are used with the following meaning illustrated. P © Q’ means “P is not smaller than Q’. P * Q’ means P is neither greater than nor smaller than Q’. P @ Q’ means P is neither greater than nor equal to Q’. P $ Q’ means P is neither smaller than nor equal to Q’. P # Q’ means P is neither smaller than nor equal to Q’. In each of the following questions assuming the given statements to be true, find out which of the three conclusions I, II and III given below them is/are definitely true. 22.


M @ T, T $ R, R © J I. J # M II. R # M III. J * T

a) Only I is true b) Only II is true c) Only III is true d) Only I and II are true e) None of the above 23.


D © B, B # H, H * F I. F @ B II. F @ D III. H @ D

a) Only I is true b) Only II is true c) Only III is true d) Only I and II are true e) All are true 137

REASONING MADE EASY

24.



H * M, M @ T, T $ K I. K # M II. T # H III. H @ K

a) Only I is true b) Only I and II are true c) Only II and III are true d) Only I and III are true e) All are true 25.


N $ A, A # J , J © D I. N @ J II. A © D III. D @ A

a) Only I is true b) Only II is true c) Only III is true d) Only II and III are true e) None of the above 26.


R * T, T @ M, M $ K I. K @ R II. M # R III. K # T

a) Only I and II are true b) Only II and III are true c) Only I and III are true d) All are true e) None of the above 27.


F # W, W $ M, M © R I. R $ W II. F # R III. W * R

a) None is true b) Only I is true c) Only II is true d) Only III is true e) Only II and III are true

Directions (Q. 28-31) Read each statement carefully and answer the following questions. 28. Which of the following expressions will be true, if the expression R > O = A > S < T is definitely true? a) O > T b) S < R c) T > A 138

REASONING MADE EASY

d) S = O


e) None of these

29. Which of the following symbols should replace the question mark (?) in the given expression in order to make the expressions P > A’ as well as T < L’ definitely true? a) ≤ b) > c) < d) ≥ e) None of these 30. Which of the following should be placed in the blank spaces respectively (in the same order from left to right) in order to complete the given expression in such a manner that makes the expression A < P’ definitely false? __ ≤ __ < __ > __ a) L, N, P, A b) L, A, P, N c) A, L, P, N d) N, A, P, L e) P, N, A, L 31. Which of the following symbols should be placed in the blank spaces respectively (in the same order from left to right) in order to complete the given expression in such a manner that makes t he expres sion F > N’ and U > D’ definitely false? F __ O __ U __ N __ D a) <, <, >, = b) <, =, =, > c) <, =, =, < d) ≥, =, =, ≥ e) >, >, =, <

Answers: 1.

Option B K@V⟶K
Optoin E H © W⟶ H≤ W W$ M⟶W= M M @ B⟶M < B H ≤ W= M < B Conclusions: I. B * H ⟶ B > H (T) II. M % H ⟶ M ≥ H (T) So, both I and II are true. 3.

Option D D%B⟶D≥ B 139



B *T⟶ B>T T$M⟶T=M D≥B > T=M Conclusions: I. T © D ⟶ T ≤ D (F) II. M © D ⟶ M ≤ D (F) Neither I nor II is true. 4.

Option A M*T⟶M>T T@K⟶TT T (T) II. N * M ⟶ N > M (F) Only I is true. 5.

Option C R$J⟶R=J J%D⟶J≥D D*F⟶D>F R=J≥D>F Conclusions: I. D $ R ⟶ D = R II. D @ R ⟶ D < R Either I or II is true.

6.

Option A M©D⟶MK K @ R ⟶ K ≤ R R*F⟶R>F Concl Co nclus usion ionss : I. F © K ⟶ F < K (False) II. D * F ⟶ D > F (False) III. M © R ⟶ M < R (False) IV. D * R ⟶ D > R (False) None is true. 7.

Option E B % K ⟶ B ≥ K K$T⟶K=T T*F⟶T>F H©F⟶H F > H Conclusions: I. B $ T ⟶ B = T II. T © B ⟶ T < B III. H © K ⟶ H < K (True) 140



IV. F © B ⟶ F < B (True) Either T is smaller than B or equal to. So, only III, IV and either I or II are true. 8.

Option B W*B⟶W>B B@F⟶B ≤F F©R⟶F B ≤ F < R = M Conclusions: I. W * F ⟶ W > F (False) II. M * B ⟶ M > B (True) III. R * B ⟶ R > B (True) IV. M * W ⟶M > W (False) So, Only II and III are true. 9.

Option C E @ K ⟶ E ≤ K K$T⟶K=T T©N⟶T T (True) IV. B * E ⟶ B > E (True) Only I, III and IV are true.

10.

Option C Z$B⟶Z=B B%M⟶B≥M M © F ⟶ F ≤ R F @ R ⟶ F ≤ R Conclusions: I. Z * M ⟶ Z > M (False) II. F * B ⟶ F > B (False) III. R * M ⟶ R > M (True) IV. M @ Z ⟶ M ≤ Z (True) Only III and IV are true.

11.

Option C H@T⟶H≤T T$N⟶T=N F©N⟶F F ≤ B Conclusions: I. F @ H ⟶ F ≤ H (False) 141



II. F © T ⟶ F < T (True) III. B * T ⟶ B > T (False) IV. B % H ⟶ B ≥ H (False) Only II is true. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

Option A Option B Option D Option E Option D Option E F%T⟶F≤T T@J⟶T=J J*W⟶J>W From all the statements together, F≤T=J>W Conclusions: I. J @ F ⟶ J = F II. J * F ⟶ J > F III. W $ T ⟶ W < T J is either greater than or equal to F. So either I or II and III are ar e true.

18.

Option C R*D⟶R>D D © K ⟶ D ≥ K K$M⟶K D ≥ K < M Conclusions: I. M * R ⟶ M > R (False) II. K $ R ⟶ K < R (True) III. D * M ⟶ D > M (False) So, only II is true.

19.

Option A Z©F⟶Z≥F F$M⟶F F (True) II. Z * M ⟶ Z > M (False) III. K * Z ⟶ K > Z (False) So, only I is true.

20.

Option D H@B⟶H=B 142



B © R ⟶ B ≥ R A$R⟶AA Conclusions: I. B * A ⟶ B > A (True) II. R % H ⟶ R ≤ H (True) III. A $ H ⟶ A < H (True) So, all I, II and III are true. 21.

Option A M$J⟶MT K©T⟶K≥T From all the three statements together, M < J < T ≤ K Conclusions: I. K * J ⟶ K > J (False) II. M $ T ⟶ M < T (False) III. M $ K ⟶ M < K (False) None is true.

22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

Option B Option E Option E Option C Option B Option A Option B Option B Option E Option C

143



Chapter – 9 Coding Decoding Directions (Q. 1-3) Study the information given below carefully to answer the following questions. In a certain code language the following lines written as lop eop aop fop’ means Traders are above laws’ fop cop bop gop’ means Developers were above profitable’ aop bop uop qop’ means Developers stopped following traders’ cop jop eop uop’ means Following maps were laws’ 1.

Developers are following laws’ would be correctly written as a) bop cop uop eop’ b) lop bop eop uop’ c) oup cop lop aop’ d) gop cop uop qop’ e) None of these

2.

qop gop cop eop’ would correctly mean a) profitabl profitablee laws were stopped stopped b) developers developers stopped stopped following following laws c) traders traders were above above profit profitable able d) were laws laws profitable profitable traders traders e) None None of thes thesee

3.

aop qop bop’ would correctly mean a) following were above b) traders stopped developers developers c) developers are laws d) traders above stopped e) laws are stopped

Directions (Q. 4-8) Study the information and answer the following questions. In a certain certain code language language.. Economics is not money’ is writen as ka la ho ga’ Demand and supply economies’ is written as mo ta pa ka’ Money makes only part’ is written as zi la ne ki’ Demand makes supply economics’ is written as zi mo ka ta’ 4.

What is the code for money’ in the given code language? a) ga b) mo c) pa d) ta e) la

5.

What is the code for supply’ in the given code language? 144

REASONING MADE EASY

a) Only ta d) Only pa

b) Only mo e) Either mo or ta


c) Either pa or mo

6. What may be the possible code for demand only more’ in the given code language? a) xi ne mo b) mo zi ne c) ki ne mo d) mo zi ki e) xi ka ta 7. What may be the possible code for work and money’ in the given code language? a) pa ga la b) pa la lu c) mo la pa d) tu la ga e) pa la ne 8.

What is the code for makes’ in the given code language? a) mo b) pa c) ne d) ho e) None of these

Directions (Q. 9-13) Study the following information and answer the given questions. In a certain code language driving is not easy’ is written as jo ro ho go’, rough and tough driving’ is written as no sa jo da’, looks easy but dangerous’ is written as ai ro to po’ and is rough tough dangerous driving’ is written as ho jo no ai da’ 9.

What is the code for easy’ in the given code language? a) go b) no c) to d) ro e) so

10.

What is the code for tough’ in the given code language? a) no b) da c) sa d) Either sa or da e) Either no or da

11.

What may be the possible code for rough but nice’? a) po bi no b) no po ai c) no to po d) no to ai e) ta jo bi

12.

What may be the possible code for easy and solved’ in the given code language? a) sa go ro b) sa ro cu c) no ro su d) cu ro go e) sa ro to

13.

What is the code for dangerous’ in the given code language? a) no b) sa c) to d) ai e) ho

145

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 14-18) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions. In a certain code language, newspaper enhance the knowledge’ is written as yo no co po’, new enhance good version’ is written as co so ro jo’, good knowledge is necessary’ is written as bo t o ro po’, the new brand book’ is written as qo jo do yo’, and book is necessary’ is written as bo do to’.

14.

What is the code for version’? a) so b) ro d) Can’t be determined e) None of these

c) jo

15.

Which of the following is the code for brand enhance version’? a) do qo co b) so qo co c) do ro co d) Can’t say e) None of these

16.

What is the code for new’? a) so b) ro d) yo e) None of these

c) jo

What is the code for necessary’? a) bo b) to d) Can’t say e) None of these

c) ro

necessary is tal ent’ willl be coded as a) mo bo to b) mo lo to d) can’t say e) None of these

c) bo to no

17.

18.

Directions (Q. 19-22) Study the following information to answer the given questions. In a certain code, ze lo ka gi’ is a code for must save some money’, fe ka so ni’ is a code for he made good money’, ni lo da so’ is a code for he must be good’ and we so ze da’ is a code for be good save grace’. 19.

20.

21.

Which of the following is the code of must’? a) so b) da d) ni e) None of these

c) lo

What does the code ze’ stand for? a) some b) must d) grave e) save

c) be

Which of the following is the code of good’? a) so b) we d) lo e) fe

c) ze

146

REASONING MADE EASY

22.

grace of money’ may be coded as a) ka da fe b) we ka so d) ka we yo e) ja ka ze


c) ja da we

Directions (Q. 23-27) In each question below is given a group of letters followed by four combinations of digits/symbols numbered a, b, c, and d. You have to find out which of the combinations correctly represents the group of letters based on the following coding system and the conditions and mark the number of that combination as your answer. If none of the combinations correctly represents the group of letter, mark e) i.e., None of these as your answer.

Letter Digit/Symbol Code

RATKFQEPJIMUDH 3 @2 1 94 © % 58 $ 6 7 @

Conditions: (i) If the first letter is a consonant and the last letter is a vowel, their codes are to be interchanged. (ii) If both the first and the last letters are vowels, both are to be coded as *. (iii) If both the first and the last letters are consonants, both are to be coded as the code for the last letter. 23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

DPEHQA a) 7%©#4@ d) @%©#4@

b) @%©#47 e) None of these

c) 7%©#47

KEMRDF a) *©$379 d) *©$37*

b) 1©$379 e) None of these

c) 1©$37*

AHDUQK a) 1#764@ d) @#764@

b) 1#7641 e) None of these

c) *#764*

IDQJPT a) 8745%2 d) 2745%2

b) 2745%8 e) None of these

c) *745%*

UDKFME a) *719$© d) ©719#$6

b) 6719$© e) None of these

c) *719$*

If white’ means black’, black’ means red’, red’ means blue’. blue’ means yellow’ and yellow’ means grey’ then which of the following represents the colour of clear sky? 147

REASONING MADE EASY

a) Blue d) Can’t be determined 29.

b) Red e) None of these


c) Yellow

In a certain code, MODEL is written as 513#2’ and DEAR is written as 3#%8’. How is LOAD written in that code? a) 21%3 b) 23%1 c) 25%3 d) 21#3 e) None of these

Directions (Q. 30-34) In each question below is given a group of letters followed by four combinations of digits/symbols numbered a, b, c and d. You have to find out which of the combinations correctly represents the group of letters based on the following coding system and the conditions and mark the number of that combination as your answer. If none of the four combinations correctly represents the group of letters, give e) i.e. ‘None of these’ as the answer.

Letters: Digit/Symbold Code:

M D R P A T W E I F H U K 5 6 # 7 8 1 @ $ 2 % 3 © 4

Z 9

Conditions: (i) If the first letter is a coinsonant and the last letter is a vowel, their codes are to be interchanged. (ii) If both the first and the last letters are vowels, both are to be coded as *. (iii) If the first letter is a vowel and the last letter is a consonant, both are to be coded as the code for the consonant. 30.

31.

32.

33.

34.

TUKDIP a) 1©4627 d) 1©6427

b) 1©4621 e) None of these

c) 7©4621

EFDMKA a) $%6548 d) 8%6548

b) $%654$ e) None of these

c) *%654*

APWTUH a) *7@1© * d) 87@1©8

b) 87@1©3 e) None of the above

c) 37@@5

MARTWE a) 58#1@$ d) $8#1@$

b) 58#1@5 e) None of these

c) $8#1@5

HEMKZI a) 2$5493 d) 2$5492

b) 3$5492 e) None of these

c) 3$5493

148

REASONING MADE EASY


35.

In a certain code SAFER is written as 5@3#2 and RIDE is written as 2©%#. How is FEDS written in that code? a) 3#©5 b) 3@%5 c) 3#%5 d) 3#%2 e) None of these

36.

In a certain code CONFUSED is written as EMBEFTV. How is SECLUDED written in that code? a) RDBKEFEV b) KBDRCDCT c) KBDREFEV d) MDFTCDCT e) None of these

37.

In a certain code language bring the white board’ is written as ka na di pa’ and white and black board’ is written as na di sa ra’. How is the’ written in that code? a) ka b) pa c) ka or pa d) Data inadequate e) None of these

Directions (Q. 38-43) In each question below is given a group of letters followed by four combinations of digits/symbols numbered a, b, c, and d. You have to find out which of the combinations correctly represents the group of letter, based on the following coding system and the conditions that follow and mark the number of thatcombination as your answer. If none of the combination correctly represents the group of letter, mark e) i.e. ‘None of these’ as your

answer. Letter: Digit/Symbol Code:

RDAEJMKTBUIPWHF 4 8 5 $ * 1 2 6 % © 7@ 3 9 #

Conditions: (i) If the first letter is a consonant and the last letter is a vowel both are to be coded as ^. (ii) If both the first and the last letters are consonants both are to be coded as the code for the last letter. (iii) If the first letter is a vowel and the last letter is a consonant their codes are to be interchanged. 38.

39.

40.

HIFMJU a) ©7#1*9 d) ^7#1*^

b) 97#1*9 e) None of these

c) ©7#1*©

AKTRBW a) 3264%5 d) 5264%3

b) 3264%3 e) None of these

c) 324%65

EBPDRI a) 7%@847 d) $%8@47

b) 7%@84$ e) None of these

c) $%@847 149

REASONING MADE EASY

41.

42.

43.

BKAJIM a) %25*71 d) 15*271

b) 125*7% e) None of these

UKPDMA a) 52@815 d) ©@2815

b) ©2@815 e) None of these

METUFB a) %$6©#1 d) 1$6©#%

b) 1$6©#1 e) None of these


c) %25*7%

c) ©2@81©

c) %$6©#%

Directions (Q. 44-48) In each question below is given a group of letters followed by four combinations of digits/symbols numbered a, b, c and d. You have to find out whi ch of the combinations correctly represents the group of letters based on the following conditions and the sub-conditions and mark the number of that combination as your answer. If none of the four combinations correctly represents the group of letters, mark e) i.e. ‘None of these’ as your answer. Letter: A M P R D H J T W E I KN F U Digit/Symbol: 3 % 4 9 1 @ 2 5 © 6 * 7 8 $ ^

Conditions: (i) If the first letter is a consonant and the last letter is a vowel, their codes are to be interchanged. (ii) If both the first as well as last letters are consonants, both are to be coded as the code for the last letter. (iii) If the first letter is a vowel and the last letter is a consonant, both are to be coded as #’. 44. APIWKN a) 34*©73 d) 84*©73 45.

46.

47.

b) #4*©7# e) None of these

c) 84*©78

HPEIUM a) @46*^% d) #46*^#

b) %46*^© e) None of these

c) @46*^@

RDEMKH a) @16%79 d) 916%79

b) 916%7@ e) None of these

c) @16%7@

FWHRKE a) 6©@976 d) $©@976

b) 6$ ©@97 e) None of these

c) 6©@97$ 150

48.

IDAPRU a) *1349^ d) ^1349^

REASONING MADE EASY


b) ^*1349 e) None of these

c) ^1349*

49.

In a certain code CROWNED is written as PSDVEFO. How is STREAMS written in that code? a) SUTDBNT b) TUSDTNB c) SUTFTNB d) QSRDTNB e) None of these

50.

DEAN’ is related to NDAE’ and ROAD’ is related to DRAO’ in the same way as SOME’ is related to a) ESMO b) EOMS c) EMOS d) MSEO e) None of these

51.

In a certain code TRAIN is written as 39*7%’ and MEAL is written as 4$*@’. How is ITEM written in that code? a) 7$34 b) 73$4 c) 79$4 d) 73*4 e) None of the above

52.

In a certain code language over and above’ is written as da pa ta’ and old and beautiful’ is written as sa na pa’. How is over’ written in that code language? a) da b) ta c) na d) da or ta e) None of these

Directions (Q. 53-57) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below In a certain code language, “exercise for your health” is written as “ja ka na se” “Health and exercise must” is written as “ka se re tu” “Must to exercise regularly” is written as “az ka dk tu” “To your good life” is written as “mo ja fu az”

53.

Which of the following may represent “exercise regularly good for health”? a) Ja m o re dk az b) fu ja re tu dk c) ka se mo na dk d) ka re az tu se e) na se tu az dk

54.

What is the code for “life”? a) mo b) fu d) az e) Either mo or fu

55.

c) ja

What is the code for “must exercise”? 151

REASONING MADE EASY

a) tu se d) fu tu

b) ka tu e) na ka


c) ka az

56.

Find the odd one out. a) January, May b) April, June c) July, August d) January, December e) None of these

57.

Which one of the given responses would be a meaningful order of the following? 1. Earth 2. Jupiter 3. Venus 4. Mars 5. Mercury a) 5, 3, 1, 2, 4 b) 5, 3, 4, 1, 2 c) 5, 3, 1, 4, 2 d) 5, 3, 2, 4, 1 e) None of these

58.

If NEWS’ is written as WENS’ then how MATE’ will be written in this code? a) TAME b) META c) EATM d) AMET e) None of these

59.

If REASON is coded as 5 and BELIEVED as 7, what is the code number for GOVERNMENT? a) 6 b) 8 c) 9 d) 10 e) None of these

Directions (Q. 60-65) In each question below is given a group of letters followed by four combinations of digits/symbols numbered a, b, c and d. you have to find out which of the combinations correctly represents the group of letters based on the following digits/symbols coding system and the condition those follow and mark the number of that combination as the answer. If none of the combinations correctly represents the group of letters mark e) i.e. None of these as the answer. Letter: Digit/Symbol Code

PMAI DEJK F N Q B U W T 695 #7$1%2 @8 ©3* 4

Conditions: (i) If the first letter is a consonant and the last letter is a vowel the codes are to be interchanged. (ii) If the first letter is a vowel and the last letter is a consonant both are to be coded as the code for the vowel. 152

REASONING MADE EASY

(iii)

60.

61.

62.

63.

64.

65.

66.


If both the first and the last letters are consonants both are to be coded as the code for the last letter. MKJIDE a) 9%1#7$ d) $%17#9

b) $%1#79 e) None of these

c) 91%#7$

INQBWU a) #@8©*3 d) 3#@8©*

b) 3@8©*# e) None of these

c) #8@*©3

KFBPAW a) *2©65% d) %2©65*

b) % 2©65% e) None of these

EFDJTP a) 62714$ d) $2714$

b) $27146 e) None of these

c) $27416

NWANUD a) @*5@37 d) @*5@3@

b) 7*5@3@ e) None of these

c) @5*@37

APFTQI a) #62485 d) 56248#

b ) #6248# e) None of these

c) 562485

c) *2©65*

In a certain code if LOUD is written as JQSF then which of the following English words shall b e coded as PKQG? a) RISE b) ROPE c) ROAD d) RICE e) ROLE

Directions (Q. 67-72) In each question below is given a group of letters followed by four combinations of digits/symbols numbered a, b, c, d, you have to find out which of the combinations correctly represents the group of letters based on the following letter coding system and mark the number of that combination as the answer. If none of the digits/symbols combinations correctly represents the group of letters, mark e) i.e., None of these as the answer. Letter: DLEGZKRUBWFHIAP Digit/Symbol: 4 8 $ 1 # 5 7 © 2 6 % * 3 9 @

Conditions: (i) If the first letter is a vowel and the last is a consonant, both are to be coded as the code of the consonant. 153

REASONING MADE EASY

(ii) (iii)

67.

68.

69.

70.

71.

72.


If both first and the last letters are consonants, both are to be coded as ^. If first letter is a consonant and last is a vowel, the codes for first and last letters are to be interchanged. ABWUPF a) %26©@% d) %26©9@

b) %26©@9 e) None of these

c) 926©@%

BFIDWE a) 2%346$ d) $2%634

b) %3426$ e) None of these

c) $%3426

WKGLBA a) 951862 d) 951826


c) 651892

ZEFHIR a) #$%*37 d) #%$*37

b) ^$%*3^ e) None of these

c) 7$%*3#

ELBGPU a) $821@© d) $812@©

b) ©821@$ e) None of these

c) $821©@

UHRKLZ a) ©*758© d) #*758©

b) ©*758# e) None of these

c) #*758#

73.

In a certain code, LAWN is written as JCUP. How will SLIT be coded in that code? a) QNGV b) QJGV c) ONVG d) NJGV e) NJVG

74.

In a certain code PRAISE is written as #@$27% and RESPIRE is written as @7#2@%. How is REPAIR written in that code? a) @%#2$@ b) @%$#2@ c) @%#$2@ d) @%$2#@ e) None of these

75.

In a certain code SATELLITE is written as FUBTLDSHK. How is LAUNCHING written in that code? a) DOUBFGMHO b) OVBMCFMHG c) OVMBCFMGH e) DOUBCFMHG e) None of these 154

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 76-81) In each of these questions, a group of letters is given followed by four combinations of digit/symbol numbered a, b, c, d. Letter are to be coded as per the scheme and conditions given below. You have to find out the serial number of the combination, which represents the letter group. Se rial number of that combination is your answer. If none of the combinations is correct, your answer is e) i.e., None of these Letters

G

Digit/Symbol Code

F 9

%

A 2

K $

E M *

7

S @

P 8

L 1

Q

B

U

R

I

T

6

5

©

4

#

3

Conditions: i) If the first letter is a vowel and the last a consonant, both are to be coded as the code for the vowel. ii) If the first letter is consonant and the last a vowel, the codes for the first and the last letters are to be interchanged. iii) If both the first and the last letters are consonant both are to be coded as ^ iv) If more than two vowels are there in the group of letters, all vowels are to coded as -76.

77.

78.

79.

80.

81.

BSQEGU a) 5@67%© d) 5@67©%

b) ^@67%^ e) None of these

c) ©@67%©

MGSELI a) *%@71# d) %#@17*

b) *%@17# e) None of these

c) #%@71*

IPKUSR a) #8$©@# d) #8$©4@

b) 48$©@# e) None of these

c) #8$©@4

TEFSUM a) ^79@©^ d) ^79@^©

b) 379@©* e) None of these

c) *79@©3

KAGFUB a) $2%9©5 d) ^2%9©^

b) 52%9©$ e) None of these

c) $2%©95

AQMMTE a) 76©*32 d) 26©*23

b) – 6--*3-e) None of these

c) 26©*32

155



82. 82.

In a cer certa tain in code code JUST JUST is writ writte ten n as as #@% #@%$ $ and and LATE LATE is wri writt tten en as ©^$* ©^$*.. How is TASTE written in that code? code? a) *^%$* b) $^%$* c) $^%*$ d) $%^%* e) None of these

83. 83.

If Blue Blue is is call called ed Gre Green en,, Gree Green n is is call called ed Oran Orange ge,, Oran Orange ge is cal calle led d Yel Yello low, w, Yellow is called Black, Black is called Red and Red is called White. What is the colou colourr of turmeric? turmeric? a) Orange b) Green c) White d) Black e) None of these

84. 84.

In a certa certain in code code ROS ROSE E is wrti wrtitt tten en as as #43$ #43$ and and FIR FIRST ST is is wri writt tten en as as 5*#3 5*#37. 7. How is STORE written in that code? a) 473$# b) 473#$ c) 374#$ d) 347#$ e) None of these

85. 85.

In a cert certai ain n co code, de, DES DESPA PAIR IR is writ writte ten n as as TFE TFEQS QSJB JB.. How How is NUME NUMERA RAL L written in that code? a) OVNFMBS b) NVOFSBN c) NVOMFBS d) NVOFMBS e) None of these

86.

If yellow’ yellow’ is called red’, red’, red’ is called blue’, blue’ blue’ is called white’, white’ is called black’, black’ is called green’ and green is called violet’, what is the colour of clear sky? a) Green b) Violet c) Yellow d) Red e) None of these

87. 87.

In a certa certain in cod code, e, STA STAR R is writ writte ten n as as 5$* 5$*2 2 and and TORE TORE is wri writt tten en as as $32 $32@. @. How is OATS written written in that code? a) 3*5$ b) 3*$5 c) 3$*5 d) 35*$ e) None of these

88.

In a certain code language, food is good’ is written as ho na ta’, eat food regularly’ is written as sa ta la’ and keep good health’ is written as da na ja’. How is eat’ written written in that code language? a) sa b) la c) sa or la d) Data inadequate e) None of these

89.

In a certain code, CORDIAL is written as SPDCMBJ’. How is SOMEDAY written in that code? a) NPTDEBZ b) NPTFZBE c) TPNDZBE d) NPTDZBE e) None of these

90.

In a certain code DOES is written as 5$3%’ and SITE is written as %4#3’. How is EDIT written in that code? a) 354# b) 3#54 c) 3$4# 156


d) 35$#


e) None of these

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

24.

25.

26.

Option B Option A Option B Option E Option E Option A Option B Option D Option D Option E Option A Option B Option D Option A Option B Option C Option D Option A Option C Option E Option A Option D Option B D P @ %

E ©

H #

Q 4

A 7

Option E K E M R 9 © $ 3 Condition (iii) follows

D 7

F 9

Option E A H D @ # 7 No condition follows.

U 6

Q 4

K 1

J

P %

T 2

Option A I D Q 8 7 4 No condition follows.

5

157


27.


Option C U D K * 7 1 Condition (ii) follows

F 9

M $

E *

28.

Option C Colour of clear sky is blue and according according to question, question, blue means yellow yellow so the colour of clear sky will be yellow’.

29.

Option A M O 5 1

D 3

E #

D 3

E #

A %

R 8

L 2

O 1

A %

D 3

30.

31.

32.

33.

34.

35.

Option A T U K 1 © 4 Condition (i) follows.

L 2

D 6

I 2

P 7

Option C E F D M * % 6 5 Condition (ii) follows.

K 4

A *

Option E A P W T 3 7 @ 1 Condition (iii) follows.

U ©

H 3

Option C M A R $ 8 # Condition (i) follows.

T 1

W @

E 5

Option A H E M 2 $ 5 Condition (i) follows.

K 4

Z 9

I 3

Option C 158


S 5

A @

F 3

E #

R 2

I ©

D %

E #

F 3

E #

D %

S 5

R 2

36.

Option C

37.

Option C Bring the white board ⟶ ka na di pa White and black board ⟶ na di sa ra From equations (i) and (ii), White board = na di Put the code of of white board in equation equation (i) Bring the = ka or pa

38.

39.

40.

41.

42.

43.

Option D H I F ^ 7 # Condition (i) follows.

M 1


J *

U ^

Option A A K T R 3 2 6 4 Condition (iii) follows.

B %

W 5

Option C E B P $ % @ No condition follows.

D 8

R 4

I 7

Option E B K A J 1 2 5 * Condition (ii) follows.

I 7

M 1

Option B U K © 2

P @

D 8

M 1

A 5

Option C M E % $

T 6

U ©

F #

B %

(i) (ii)

159



Condition (ii) follows. 44.

45.

46.

47.

48.

Option B A P I W # 4 * © Condition (iii) follows.

K 7

N #

Option E H P E I % 4 6 * Condition (ii) follows.

U ^

M %

Option C R D E M @ 1 6 % Condition (ii) follows.

K 7

H @

Option C F W H 6 © @ Condition (i) follows.

R 9

K 7

E $

R 9

U ^

Option A I D * 1

A 3

P 4

Option E Option A 1 2 D E

3 A

4 N

4 N

1 D

3 A

2 E

And

1 R

2 O

3 A

4 D

4 D

1 R

3 A

2 O

So,

1 S

2 O

3 M

4 E

4 E

1 S

3 M

2 O

51.

Option B T R 3 9 M E 4 $ I T 7 3

A * A * E $

I 7 L @ M 4

49. 50.

And So,

52.

N %

Option D 160

REASONING MADE EASY


Over and above da pa ta Old and beautiful sa na pa So, the code of over will be da or ta. 53.

Option C Exercise ⟶ ka Regularly ⟶ dk Good ⟶ mo or fu For ⟶ na Health ⟶ se

54.

Option E The code for “life” may be “mo” or “fu”.

55.

Option B Must ⟶ tu Exercise ⟶ ka

56.

Optoin B Except the months of April and June, all other months have 31 days each.

57.

Option B

58.

Option A 1 2 N E Similarly, 1 2 M A

3 W

4 S

3 W

2 E

1 N

4 S

3 T

4 E

3 T

2 A

1 M

4 E

59.

Option C REASON ⟶ 5 Number of letters ⎯ 1 BELIEVED ⟶ 8 ⎯ 1 = 7 Similarly, GOVERNMENT ⟶ 10 ⎯ 1 = 9

60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67.

Option B Option A Option C Option D Option E Option D Option C Option A 161

REASONING MADE EASY

68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90.


Option E Option D Option B Option A Option C Option A Option C Option B Option E Option C Option D Option A Option D Option B Option B Option D Option C Option D Option E Option B Option C Option D Option A

162

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 10 Decision Making Directions (Q. 1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions given below: Following are the conditions for admitting students in an Engineering College: (i) Have secured at least 75% agreegate marks in XII Std. exam in science stream. (ii) Have secured an average of at least 85% marks in Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics in XII Std. exam. (iii) Pay Rs.50, 000 at the time of admission. (iv) Be at least 17 years old as on 01st May 2014 However, in the case of a candidate who fulfils all the criteria except (a) (ii) Above, but has secured 90% aggregate marks, he/she should be referred to the Principal. (b) (iii) Above, but pays at least Rs.40000 he/she should be referred to the Chairman, Admission. Based on the above criteria and information provided below, make a decision in each case. You are not to assume anything. If the data given are not enough to take a decision mark your answer as data I nadequate’. These cases are given to you as on 01.05.2014. Give answer a) b) c) d) e)

If the case is to be referred to the Principal If the student is to be admitted If the data are inadequate to take a decision If the student is not to be admitted If the case is to be referred to the Chairman Admission.

1.

Nisha Malhotra has secured aggregate 80% marks I n XII Std. exam in science stream. She can pay Rs.40,000 at the time of admission. She has secured 86% average marks in Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics. a) If the case is to be referred to the Principal b) If the student is to be admitted c) If the data are inadequate to take a decision d) If the student is not to be admitted e) If the case is to be referred to the Chairman Admission.

2.

Arindam Ghosh was born on 25 August 1995. He can pay Rs.60,000 at the time of admission. He has secured 80% aggregate marks in XII Std. exam 163

REASONING MADE EASY


in science stream and also 85% average marks in Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics. a) If the case is to be referred to the Principal b) If the student is to be admitted c) If the data are inadequate to take a decision d) If the student is not to be admitted e) If the case is to be referred to the Chairman Admission. 3.

Arun Khanna has secured 90% aggregate marks in XII Std. exam in science stream and he can also pay Rs.50,000 at the time of admission. He was born on Feb. 20, 1996. He has secured 89% average marks in Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics. a) If the case is to be referred to the Principal b) If the student is to be admitted c) If the data are inadequate to take a decision d) If the student is not to be admitted e) If the case is to be referred to the Chairman Admission.

4.

Kiran Thapar was born on July 15, 1994. He can pay Rs.40,000 at the time of admission. He has secured 79% average in Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics. He has secured 86% aggregate marks in XII Std. exam in science stream. a) If the case is to be referred to the Principal b) If the student is to be admitted c) If the data are inadequate to take a decision d) If the student is not to be admitted e) If the case is to be referred to the Chairman Admission.

5.

Vimal Upadhyaya was born on September 20, 1996. He has secured 78% aggregate marks in XII Std. exam in science stream. He can pay Rs.42,000 at the time of admission. He has secured 88% marks in Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics. a) If the case is to be referred to the Principal b) If the student is to be admitted c) If the data are inadequate to take a decision d) If the student is not to be admitted e) If the case is to be referred to the Chairman Admission.

Directions (Q. 6-10) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. Following are the conditions for selecting Marketing Manager in an organization:

The candidate must ____ (i) Be at least 30 years old as on 01.03.2009 (ii) Have secured at least 55% marks in graduation 164

REASONING MADE EASY

(iii) (iv) (v)


Have secured at least 60% marks in Post Graduate4 Degree/Diploma in Marketing. Have post qualification work experience of at least five years in th e Marketing Division of an organization Have secured at least 45% marks in the selection process.

In the case of a candidates who satisfies all other conditions except (a) At (iv) above, but has post qualification work experience of at least two years as Deputy Marketing Manager, the case is to be referred to GMMarketing. (b) At (ii) above, but has secured at least 65% marks in Post Graduate Degree /Diploma in Marketing Management, the case is to be referred to Vice President-Marketing. In each question below is given details of one candidate. You have to take one of the following courses of action based on the information provided and the conditions and sub-conditions given above and mark your answer accordingly. You are not to assume anything other than the information provided in each question. All these cases are given to you as on 01.03.2009.

Give answer: a) If the candidate is not to be selected. b) If the candidate is to be selected. c) If the data are inadequate to take a decision. d) If the case is to be referred to Vice President-Marketing. e) If the case is to be referred to GM-Marketing. 6. Suresh Mehta has secured 58% marks in Graduation. He was born on 19th May 1975. He has secured 50% marks in the selection process. He h as been working for the past seven years in the Marketing devision of an organization after completing his Post Graduation with 62% marks. 7. Sudha Gopalan has secured 50% marks in both selection process and Graduation. She has been working for the past six years in the marketing division of an organization after completing her Post Graduate Diploma in Marketing with 70% marks. She was born on 14 th October 1978. 8. Divya Kohli has been working for the past five years in Marketing Division of an organization after completing her Post Graduate Diploma in Marketing with 65% marks. She has secured 55% marks in Graduation and 50% marks in the selection process. She was born on 02 nd April 1979. th

9. Navin Marathe was born on 08 April 1975. He has secured 60% marks in both Graduation and Post Graduate Degree in Marketing. He has been working for the past six years in the Marketing division of an organization after completing 165

REASONING MADE EASY


his PG Degree in Marketing. He has secured 50% marks in the selection process. 10. Varun Malhotra was born on 03rd July 1976. He has been working as Deputy Marketing Manager in an organization for the past three years after completing his Post Graduate Degree in Marketing with 65% marks. He secured 55% marks in both Graduation and selection process.

Directions (Q. 11-20) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. Following are the conditions for selecting Personnel Manager in an organization: The candidate must: (i) Be a graduate with at least 50% marks. (ii) Have a Post Graduate Degree/Diploma in personnel Management /HR with at least 60% marks. (iii) Not be more than 35 years as on 01.06.2009 (iv) Have post qualification work experience of at least five years in the Personnel/HR Division of an organisation. (v) Have secured at least 45% marks in the selection process.

In the case of a candidate who satisfies all the conditions except(a) (iii) Above, but has post-qualification work experience of at least ten years, the case is to be referred to the Director-Personnel. (b) At (iv) above, but has post-qualification work experience as Deputy Manager of at least three years, th e case is to be referred to PresidentPersonnel. In each question below are given details of one candidate. You have to take one of the following courses of action based on the information provided and the conditions and sub-conditions given above and mark the number of that course of action as your answer. You are not to assume anything other than the information provided in each question. All these cases are given to you as on 01.06.2009.

Give answer: a) If the candidate is to be selected. b) If the candidate is not to be selected. c) If the information provided is inadequate to take a decision. d) If the case is to be referred to the Director-Personnel. e) If the case is to be referred to the President-Personnel. th

11. Meena Srivastava was born on 06 March 1978. She has been working as Deputy Personnel Manager in an organization for the past four years after completing her Post Graduate Diploma in HR with 68% marks. She has secured 50% marks in both graduation and selection process. 166

REASONING MADE EASY


12. Ketan Desai was born on 05th January 1979. He has been working for the past five years in the personnel department of an organisation after completing his Post Graduate Diploma in Personnel Management with 64 % marks. He has secured 40% marks in the selection process and 52% marks in Graduation. 13. Anant Joshi has been working in the Personnel Department of an organisation th for the past six years. He was born on 07 November 1977. He has secured 60% marks in post Graduate Degree in Personnel Management. He has also secured 55% marks in both Graduation and selection process. 14. Mohan Bajpai was born on 10th April 1975. He has secured 55% marks in Graduation and 65% marks in Post Graduate Diploma in Personnel Management. He has been working in the HR Department of an organisation for the past six years after completing his Post Graduate Diploma. 15. Gopal Sharma has been working for the past five years in the HR Department of an organisation after completing his Post Graduate Diploma in HR with 62% marks. He has secured 50% marks in both Graduate and selection process. He was born on 29th May 1974. 16. Arun Vohra has secured 55% marks in Graduation. He has been working in the Personnel Department of an organisation for the past eleven years after completing his post Graduate Degree in Personnel Management with 65% th marks. He has secured 50% marks in the selection process. He was born on 12 August 1972. 17. Asha Dhar has secured 52% marks in Graduation and 62% marks in Post Graduate Degree in Personnel Management. She has also secured 48% marks in the selection process. She has been working for the past seven years in the Personnel Department of an organisation after completing her Post Graduate Degree. She was born on 08th June 1974. 18. Sudha Ghosal was born on 20th October 1976. She has been working as Deputy Personnel Manager for the past four years in an organisation after completing her Post Graduate Degree in HR with 67% marks. She has secured 60% marks in Graduation and 45% marks in the selection process. 19. Amit Saxena was born on 25th July 1973. He has been working in the Personnel Department of an organisation for the past eleven years after completing his Post Graduate Diploma in HR with 70% marks. He has secured 60% ma rks in both Graduation and selection process. 20. Navin Das was born on 14th April 1978. He has been working in the Personnel Department of an organisation for the past six years after completing his Post 167

REASONING MADE EASY


Graduate Diploma in HR with 65% marks. He has secured 45% marks in both Graduation and selection process.

Directions (Q. 21-25) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below Following are the conditions for selecting Systems Manager in an organization:

The candidate must (i) Be a graduate engineer in IT, Computer Science, Electronics with at least 60% marks (ii) Be at least 30 years and not more than 40 years as on 01.09.2009 (iii) Have secured at least 40% marks in the written examination (iv) Have secured at least 50% marks in the selection interview (v) Have post qualification work experience of at least 10 years in the Systems Department of an organization. In the case of a candidate who satisfies all the conditions except (a) At (i) above, but secure at least 60% marks in MEIT or Computer Science, the case as to be referred to DGM-Systems. (b) At (v) above, but has post qualification experince of at least five years as Deputy Systems Manager the case is to be referred to the GM-Systems. In each question below, details of one candidate are given. You have to take one of the following courses of actions based on the information provided and the conditions and sub-conditions given above and mark the number of that course of action as your answer. You are not to assume anything else other than the information provided for each candidate. All these cases are given to you as on 01.09.2009.

Give answer: (a) If the candidate is to be selected (b) If the candidate is not to be selected (c) If the case is to be referred to DGM-Systems (d) If the case is to be referred to GM-Systems (e) If the data provided are not adequate to take a decision. 21. Samir Ghosh was born on 25th May 1978. He has secured 65% marks in BE-IT in the year 1999. Since then he is working in the systems department of an organization. He has secured 50% marks in both written examination and selection interview. 22. Navin Prakash has secured 62% marks in 65% marks in BE-Computer Science. He has been working in the systems department of an organization since July 1999 after completion of BE. He was born on 4 April 1974. He has secured 55% marks in selection interview and 45% marks in the written examination. 168

REASONING MADE EASY


23. Neeta Pathak has been working as Deputy Systems Manager in an organization for the past 7 years after completing her B.E. in IT with 70% marks. She has secured 45% marks in selection interview and 55% marks in the written examination. She was born on 12th November 1978. 24. Ashok Malhotra was born on 19th March 1977. He has secured 56% marks I n both selection interview and written examination. He has secured 58% marks in BE-IT and 72% marks in ME-IT. He has been working in the systems department of an organization for the past 11 years after copleting ME-IT. 25. Geema D’Souza was born on 15th December 1972. She has secured 60% marks in both written examination and selection interview. She has been working as Deputy Systems Manager for the last 6 years in an organization after completing her BE-Electronics with 75% marks.

Directions (Q. 26-35) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below. Following are the conditions for selecting Accounts Manager in an organization.

The candidate must (i) Be a graduate in Commerce with minimum 55% marks (ii) Be a post graduate in Commerce with minimum 50 % marks (iii) Have post qualification work experience of at least three years in the Accounts department in an organization. (iv) Not be less than 25 years and not more than 35 years old as on 01.05.2008. (v) Have secured at least 40% marks in the selection process. In the case if candidate satisfies all other criteria exceptA. At (ii) above but h as work experience of at least four years as Assistant Accounts Manager in an organization. His/her case is to be referred to GMAccounts of the organization. B. At (iii) above but has successfully completed CA/ICWA, the case is to be referred to Director Finance.

In each question below details of one candidate is given. You have to take one of the following courses of action in each case based on the information provided and the conditions and sub-conditions given above and mark the number of that course of action as your answer. You are not to assume anything other the information provided in each case. All t he cases are given to you as on 01.05.2008. Give answer: a) If the data provided are not adequate to take a decision. 169

REASONING MADE EASY


b) If the case is t o be referred to GM- Accounts. c) If the case is to be referred to Director-Finance. d) If the candidate is not to be selected. e) If the candidate is to be selected. 26. Abhinav Chaturvedi is a Commerce graduate with 60% marks. He has been working in the Accounts Department of an organization for the past four years after completing his Post Graduation in Commerce with 55% marks. He was born on 08th July 1980. He has secured 45% marks in the selection process. 27. Vaibhav Sinha was born on 12th April 1979. He has been working as Assistant Accounts Manager in an organization for the past five years after completing his post Graduation in Commerce with 40% marks. He has secured 55% marks in both the selection process and Graduation in Commerce. 28. Seema Bhasin has secured 60% marks in Graduation in Commerce and 55% marks in post Graduation in Commerce. She has secured 55% marks in the selection process. She was born on 20 th August 1978. She has also successfully completed her CA. She does not have any work experience. 29. Nirmala Sawant was born on 04th July 1981. She has been working in the Accounts department in an organization after completing her post graduation Commerce with 65% marks. She has secured 50% marks in the selection process. 30. Ashok Pradhan was born on 03rd May 1979. He has secured 42% marks in the selection process. He has been working in the Accounts Department of an organization for the past four years after completing his post Graduation in Commerce with 62% marks. He has secured 54% marks in his Graduation in Commerce. 31. Prabir Mazumdar has secured 58% marks in his Graduation in Commerce and 53% marks in post Graduation in Commerce. He has been working as Assistant Accounts Manager in an organization for the past four years after completing his post Graduation. He has secured 44% marks in the selection process. He th was born on 14 November 1977. 32. Neha Dev was born on 08th February 1976. She has been working in the Accounts Department of an organization for the past three years after completing her post Graduation in Commerce with 53% marks. She has secured 57% marks in Graduation in Commerce. She appeared in selection process. 33. Sudha Goswami was born on 19th October 1982. She has been working as Assistant Accounts Manager in an organization for the past five years after 170

REASONING MADE EASY


completing her Graduation in Commerce with 60% marks. She has secured 50% marks in the selection process. 34. Francis D’costa has secured 60% marks in both graduation and Post Graduation in Commerce. He has successfully completed ICWA after his Graduation. He has been working in the Account Department of an organization for last one year. 35. Prathama Sengupta has secured 55% marks in Post Graduation in Commerce and 45% marks in the selection process. She was born on 11 th April 1981. She has been working in the Accounts Department of an organization for the past four years after completing her Post Graduation. She has secured 50% marks in Graduation in Commerce.

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Option C Option B Option B Option D Option E Option C Suresh Mehta’s condition (iii) is not given so data is insufficient to take decision.

7.

Option D Sudha Gopalan fulfils condition (b) instead of condition (ii) so, her case is to be referred to Vice President-Marketing.

8.

Option A Divya Kohli does not fulfil condition (i) so, she is not to be selected.

9.

Option B Navin Marathe fulfils all conditions so, he is to be selected.

10.

Option E Varun Malhotra fulfils condition (a) instead of (iv) so, his case is to be referred to GM-Marketing.

11.

Option E Meena Srivastava fulfils conditions (b) instead of condition (iv) so, her case is to be referred to the President-Personnel.

12.

Option B Ketan Desai does not fulfil condition (v) so, he is not to be selected. 171

REASONING MADE EASY


13.

Option C Post qualification work of Anant Joshi is not cleared (which is least 5 years) so, data is insufficient.

14.

Option C Marks of selection process (i.e. 45%) is not cleared so, data is Insufficient.

15.

Option B Gopal Sharma is overaged.

16.

Option D Arun Vohra fulfils condition (a) instead of (iii) so, his case is to be referred to the Director-Personnel.

17.

Option A Asha Dhar fulfils all conditions so, she is to be selected.

18.

Option E Sudha Ghosal fulfils condition (b) instead of (iv) so, her case is to be referred to President-Personnel.

19.

Option D Amit Saxena fulfils condition (a) instead of (iii) so, his case is to be referred to the Director-Personnel.

20.

Option B Navin Das does not fulfil condition (i) so, he is not to be selected.

21.

Option E Sameer’s working experience is not cleared in years. So, data is insufficient.

22.

Naveen Prakash fulfils all conditions so, he is to be selected.

23.

Option B Neeta Pathak does not fulfil condition (iv) so, she is not to be selected.

24.

Optoin C Ashok Malhotra fulfils condition (a) so, his case is to be referred to DGMsystems.

25.

Option D Geema D’Souza fulfils condition (b) so, her case is to be referred to GMsystems. 172

REASONING MADE EASY

26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.


Option E Option B Option C Option A Option D Option E Option D Option B Option C Option D

173

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 11 Direction Sense 1.

P walked 20 m towards North, took a left turn and walked 10 m, then took a right turn and walked 20 m, again took a right turn and walked 10 m. How far is he from his starting point? a) 50 m b) 60 m c) 40 m d) Can’t be determined e) None of these

2.

Kunal walked 10 m, towards the East, turned right and walked another 15 m. He then turns left and walks 3 m. He finally takes a left turn after walking 6 m. Which direction is he facing now? a) East b) North c) West d) South e) South-West

3.

Town D is to the West of town M. Town R is to the South of town D. Town K is to the East of town R. Town K is towards which direction of town D? a) South b) East c) North-East d) South-East e) None of these

4.

Ram walks 12 kms to the North, then 10 kms. To West, 12 kms. to South. How far is Ram from the starting point? a) 9 kms. b) 13 kms. c) 8 kms. d) 10 kms. e) None of these

5.

One morning Udai and Vishal were talking to each other face to face at a crossing. If Vishal’s shadow was exactly to the left of Udai, which direction was Udai facing? a) East b) West c) North d) South e) None of these

6.

Two cars start from the opposite places of a main road, 150 km apart. First car runs for 25 km and takes a right turn and then runs 15 km. It then turns left and then runs for another 25 km and then takes the direction back to reach the main road. In the mean time, due to minor break down the other car has run only 35 km along the main road. What would be the distance between two cars at this point? a) 65 km b) 75 km c) 80 km d) 85 km e) None of these

7.

The length and breadth of a room are 8 m and 6 m respectively. A cat runs along all the four walls and finally along a diagonal order to catch a rat. How much total distance is covered by the cat? a) 10 b) 14 c) 38 174

REASONING MADE EASY

d) 48


e) None of these

8.

X started to walk straight towards south. After walking 5 m he turned to the left and walked 3 m. After this he turned to right and walked 5 m now to which direction X is facing? a) North-East b) South c) North d) South-West e) None of these

9.

If A × B means A is to the South of B, A + B means is to the North of B, A % B means A is to the east of B, A ⎯ B means A is to the West of B, then in P % Q + R ⎯ S, S is in which direction with respect to Q? a) South-West b) South-East c) North-East d) North-West e) None of these

10.

One morning after sunrise, Suresh was standing facing a pole. The shadow of the pole fell exactly to his right. To which direction was he facing? a) East b) South c) West d) Data is inadequate e) None of these

11.

Rohit walked 25 m towards South. Then he turned to his left and walked 20 m. He then turned to his left and walked 25 m. He again turned to his right and walked 15 m. At what distance is he from the starting point and in which direction? a) 35 m East b) 35 m North c) 30 m West d) 45 m East e) None of these

12.

Sachin walks 20 km towards North. He turns left and walks 40 km. He again turns left and walks 20 km. Finally he moves 20 km after turning to the left. How far is he from his starting position? a) 20 km b) 30 km c) 50 km d) 60 km e) None of these

Dirrections (Q. 13-16) Each of the following is based on the following information: (i) Six flats on a floor in two rows facing North and South are allotted to P, Q, R, S, T and U. (ii) Q gets a North facing flat and is not next to S. (iii) S and U get diagonally opposite flats. (iv) R next to U gets a South facing flat and T gets North facing flat. 13.

If the flats of P and T are interchanged then whose flat will be next to that of U? a) P b) Q c) R d) T e) None of these 175

REASONING MADE EASY


14.

Which of the following combination get South facing flats? a) QTS b) UPT c) URP d) Data is inadequate e) None of these

15.

The flats of which of the other pair than SU, is diagonally opposite to each other? a) QP b) QR c) PT d) TS e) None of these

16.

Whose flat is between Q and S? a) T b) U d) P e) None of these

c) R

17.

Starting from a point, Raju walked 12 m North, he turned right and walked 10 km, he again turned right and walked 12 m, then he turned left and walked 5 m. How far is he now and in which direction from the starting point? a) 27 m towards East b) 5 m towards East c) 10 m towards West d) 15 m towards East e) None of these

18.

Ravi travelled 4 km straight towards South. He turned left and travelled 6 km straight, then turned right and travelled 4 km straiht. How far is he from the starting point? a) 8 km b) 10 km c) 12 km d) 18 km e) None of these

19.

From point P, Akshay starts walking towards East. After walking 30 m, he turns to his right and walks 10 m. He then turns to his right and walks for 30 m. He again turns to his right and walks 30 m. How far is he from point P and in which direction? a) Point P itself b) 10 m, North c) 20 m, West d) 20 m, North e) None of these

20.

Facing towards South, Ram started walking and turned left after walking 30 m, he walked 25 m and turned left and walked 30 m. How far is he from his starting position and in which direction? a) At the starting point only b) 25 m, West c) 25 m, East d) 30 m, East e) None of these 176

REASONING MADE EASY


21.

The town of Paranda is located on Gree lake. The town of Akram is West of Paranda. Tokhada is East of Akram but West of Paranda. Kokran is East of Bopri but West of Tokhada and Akram. If they are all in the same district, which town is the farthest West? a) Paranda b) Kokran c) Akram d) Tokhada e) Bopri

22.

B is to the South-West of A, C is to the East of B and South-East of A and D is to the North of C in line with B and A. In which direction of A is D located? a) North b) East c) SouthEast d) North-East e) None of these

23.

A man is facing West. He turns 45° in the clockwise direction and then

another 180° in the same direction and then 270° in the anticlockwise direction. Find which direction he is facing now? a) South-West d) East-South

b) West e) None of these

c) South

24.

A dog runs 20 metre towards East and turns Right, runs 10 metre and turns to right, runs 9 metre and again turns to left, runs 5 metre and then turns to left, runs 12 metre and finally turns to left and runs 6 metre. Now which direction dog is facing? a) East b) North c) West d) South e) None of these

25.

Rahul put his timepiece on the table in such a way that at 06:00 p.m. hour hand points to North. In which direction the minute hand will point at 09:15 p.m.? a) South-East b) South c) North d) West e) None of these

26.

K is 40 m South-West of L. If M is 40 m South-East of L, then M is in which direction of K? a) East b) West c) NorthEast d) South e) None of these

27.

A child went 90 m in the East to look for his father, then he turned right and went 20 m. After this he turned right and after going 30 m he reached to his uncle’s house. His father was not there. From there h e went 100 m to his North and met his father. How far did he meet his father from the starting point? a) 80 m b) 100 m c) 140 m d) 260 m e) None of these 177

REASONING MADE EASY


28.

Ravi wants to go to the University. He starts from his home which is in the East and comes to a crossing. The road to the left ends in a theatre, straight ahead is the hospital. In which direction is the University? a) North b) South c) East d) West e) None of these

29.

A river flows West to East and on the way turns left and goes in a semicircle round a hillock, and then turns left at right angles. In which direction in the river finally flowing? a) West b) East c) North d) South e) None of these

30.

You go North, turn right, then right again and then go the left. In which direction are you now? a) North b) South c) East d) West e) None of these

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

Option C Option B Option D Option D Option C Option A Required distance

Option C Required distance

= DF = 150 ⎯ (25 + 25 + 35) = 150 ⎯ 85 = 65 km

= 8 + 6 + 8 + 6 + √ 8 + 6 = 28 + √ 100 = 28 + 10 = 38 m

8.

Option B X will face in the end towards South.

9.

Option B S is in the South-East of Q.

10.

Option B Sun rises in the East in the morning. Since the shadow of Suresh falls to his right. So, he is facing South. 178

REASONING MADE EASY

11.

Option A Required distance


= AE = 20 + 15 = 35 m towards East

12.

Option A Required distance = 40 ⎯ 20 = 20 km

13.

Option C Flat R will be next to U

14.

Option C URP flat combination get South facing flats.

15.

Option A QP is diagonally opposite to each other.

16.

Flat T is between Q and S.

17.

Option D

18.

Option B

19.

Option D

20.

Option C

21.

Option E

22.

Option D

23.

Option A The man firstly faces the direction OA. On moving 45° clockwise, he faces the direction OB. Now, again he moved 180 ° clockwise, now, he will be facing OC. From here he moved 270° anticlockwise, Finally he is facing OD, which is SouthWest.

24.

Option B

25.

Option D

179

REASONING MADE EASY


At 09:15 p.m., the minute hand will point towards West. 26.

Option A

M is in the East of K. 27.

Option B

28.

Option A

180

REASONING MADE EASY


Starting from his house in the East, Ravi moves westwards. Then the theatre, which is to the left, will be in the South. The hospital, which is straight ahead, will be to the West. So, the University will be to the North.

29.

Option B

30.

Option C

181

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 12 Letter and Number Series 1.

If in the word ISOLATE, all the consonants are replaced by the previous letter in the alphabet and all the vowels are replaced by the next letter then all the letters are arranged alphabetically, which letter will be third from the right end? a) P b) B c) N d) Q e) None of these

2.

If in the word EQUALITY, the positions of first and the fifth letters are interchanged; similarly the positions of the second and the sixth letters are interchanged and so on. Which letter will be third from the right end? a) Q b) U c) I d) T e) None of these

3.

How many meaningful English words can be made from the letters AERT, using each letter only once in each word? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) Four

4.

How many such pairs of letters are there in the word REFRESHING each of which has as many letters between them in the word as they have in the English alphabet? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

5.

If in the number 38564927 first all the even digits are arranged in ascending order and then all the odd digits are arranged in ascending order, which digit will be fourth from the right end? a) 5 b) 3 c) 6 d) 4 e) None of these

6.

How many such pairs of letters are there in the word BOARDING each of which has as many letters between them in the word as in the English alphabet? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

7.

How many such digits are there in the number 284371 each of which is as far away from the beginning of the number as when they are arranged in descending order? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three 182

REASONING MADE EASY


8.

How many meaningful English words can be made with the letters only once in each word? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

9.

How many meaningful English words can be made with the letters ONDE using each letter only once in each word? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

10.

How many such pairs of letters are there in the word JUMPING each of which has as many letters between them in the word as in the English alphabet? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

11.

How many such digits are there in the number 6837941 each of which is as far away from the beginning in the number as when the digits are arranged in descending order within the number? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

12.

What should come next in the following letter series? PPOPONPONMPONMLPONML a) P b) K c) J d) I e) None of these

13.

How many such pairs of letters are there in the word STAPLER each of which has as m any letters between them in the word as in the English alphabet? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

14.

How many such pairs of letters are there in the word OBJECTIVE each of which has as many letters between them in the word as in the English alphabet? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

15.

If each consonant in the word TOLERANT is replaced by the previous letter in the English alphabet and each vowel in the word is replaced by the next letter in the English alphabet and the new set of letters are arranged alphabetically, which of the following will be the 4th from the right end after the replacement? a) M b) P c) Q 183

REASONING MADE EASY

d) K


e) None of these

16.

How many such pairs of digits are there in the number 8429516 each of which has as many digits between them in the number as when the digits are arranged in ascending order within the number? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

17.

The positions of the first and the second digits in the number 85341279 are interchanged. Similarly the positions of 3 rd and 4th digits are interchanged and so on till the position of 7 th and 8th digits. Which of the following will be 3rd to the right of three after the rearrangement? a) 9 b) 7 c) 8 d) 2 e) None of these

18.

How many meaningful English words can be formed with the letters MRTA using each letter only once in each word? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

19.

The positions of the first and the fifth digit in the number 53216894 are interchanged. Similarly, the position of the second and the sixth digit are in terchanged and so on. Which of the following will be the second from t he right end after the rearrangement? a) 3 b) 2 c) 1 d) 9 e) None of these

20.

The positions of how many digits in the number 53147926 will remain unchanged after the digits within the number are rearranged in descending order? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

21.

How many such pairs of letters are there in the word HOARDINGS each of which has as many letters between them in the word as in the English alphabet? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

22.

How many such pairs of letters are there in the word DISCREDIT each of which has as many letters between them in the word as in the English alphabet? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

184

REASONING MADE EASY


23.

If it is possible to make only one meaningful English word with 3 rd, 4th, 6th and 8th letters of the word SINGLETON, which of the following will be 3 rd letter of that word? If no such word can be made, g ive X’ as the answer and I f more than one such word can be made, give Y’ as the answer. a) N b) O c) E d) X e) Y

24.

What should come next in the following number series? 987654321123456789987654322345678 a) 8 b) 1 c) 9 d) 2 e) None of these

25.

How many such digits are there in the number 764528 each of which is as far away from the beginning of the number as when the digits are arranged in descending order within the number? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

26.

What should come next in the letter series given below? ABABCABCDABCDEABCDEFABCDEFGABC a) D b) E c) F d) H e) None of these

27.

How many meaningful English words can be made with the letters EPRY using each letter only once in each word? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

Directions (Q. 28-34) In each of the following questions, a series is given with one term missing. Choose the correct alternative from the given ones that will complete the series. 28.

29.

30.

31.

AD, EI, JN, PS, ? a) WY d) WW

b) XX e) None of these

c) WX

PON, RQP, TSR, VUT, ? a) WUY d) UVW

b) YXZ c) XWV e) None of these

ar, cs, et, ? a) wy d) gu

b) gv e) None of these

c) vb

9, 15, 23, 33, ? a) 44

b) 36

c) 38 185

REASONING MADE EASY

32.

33.

34.


d) 45

e) None of these

4, 7, 14, 24, 41, ? a) 71 d) 51


5, 16, 51, 158, ? a) 481 d) 478

c) 72

b) 465 c) 441 e) None of these

CBA, ABC, ABCD, DCBA, ABCDE, ? a) EDCBA b) DBAC d) BACD e) None of these

c) CABD

35.

How many meaningful English words can be formed with the letters LTSO using each letter only once in each word? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

36.

How many such digits are there in the number 928416375 each of which is as far away from th e beginning in the number as when the digits are arranged in descending order within the number? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

37.

What should come next in the following letter series? Cbaacbaabcbaabccbaabcdcbaa a) a b) b c) c d) d e) None of these

Directions (Q. 38-43) Study the number series given below and answer the questions which follow. 6

7 8 99 8 79 7 78 97 8 76 96 8 97 79 8 97 68 8 7

38.

How many such numbers are there in the given series each of which when subtracted from the following number has a difference of 2? a) Three b) Four c) Five d) Nine e) None of these

39.

Which of the following nu mbers is obtained when 18 th number from the left of the number series is added to 19th from the right? a) 15 b) 20 c) 10 d) 17 e) None of these

186

REASONING MADE EASY


40.

How many nines are there in the given series each of which is immediately preceded by an odd number? a) One b) Two c) Three d) Four e) More than four

41.

How many such even numbers are there in the given series each of which is immediately followed by an even number? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

42.

How many such odd numbers are there in the given series each of which is immediately preceded by an even number? a) Five b) Seven c) Nine d) Eleven e) None of these

43.

How many such sevens are there in the given series each of which is immediately preceded by 9 and also immediately followed by 8? a) None b) One c) Two d) Three e) More than three

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

11.

12.

Option A Option A Option C Option D Option B OptionC Option D Option C Option C DONE and NODE Option C J U M 10 21 13

P 16

I 9

N 14

G 7

Option C Number 6 8 3 7 Decreasing Order 9 8 7 6 There will be no change in the place of 8 and 1. Option B Series are increasing as follows: P PO PON PONM PONML

9 4

4 3

1 1

PONMLK 187

REASONING MADE EASY

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18. 19.

20.

21. 22.

23.

Option C S T A S ⎯ T and S ⎯ P

P

L

E

R

C

T

I

V

R

A

N

T

Q

B

M

S

P

Q

S

S

9

5

1

6

5

6

8

9

8

5

3

4

1

2

7

8

4

3

2

1

9

7

6

8

9

4

7

9

Option C O B J E Two pairs formed – IO, TV Option B T O L E According to question, S P K F Alphabetically, B F K M th So, P is 4 from the right. Option C 8 4 2 In increasing order 1 2 4 Option A Number: 9 Arrangement:

5

Option C The meaningful words are: MART, TRAM Option B Number: 5 3 2 1 After interchanging the digits 6 8 9 4 5 3 Option B Number: 2 6 In decreasing order:


E

2

5

3

1

4

7

6

5

4

Option E Option E D I S C R E So, CE, DI, DE, EI are pairs of letters. Option A

D

I

T

1 S

7 T

8 O

9 N

2 I

3 N

9

4 G

5 L

6 E

188

REASONING MADE EASY

24. 25.

Meaningful word from NGEO is GONE. 3rd letter in the word GONE is N Option C 987654321, 123456789, 98765432, 2345678 Option B 7 8

26.


6 7

4 6

5 5

2 4

8 2

Option A AB, ABC, ADCD, ABCDE, ABCDEF, ABCDEFG, ABC D

27.

28. 29. 30. 31.

Option C Meaningful words PREY, PYRE Option C Option C Option D Option D 9 + 6 = 15 15 + 8 = 23 23 + 10 = 33 33 + 12 = 45

32.

Option B 4+3=7 7 + 4 + 3 = 14 14 + 3 + 7 = 24 24 + 7 + 10 = 41 41 + 10 + 17 = 68

33.

Option A 5 × 3 + 1 = 16 16 × 3 + 3 = 51 51 × 3 + 5 = 158 158 × 3 + 7 = 481 Option A CBA ⟶ ABC Reverse order ABCD ⟶ DCBA ABCDE ⟶ EDCBA Option D Option C Option B Option E

34.

35. 36. 37. 38.

189

REASONING MADE EASY

39. 40. 41. 42. 43.


Option A Option C Option D Option C Option B

190

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 13 Logical Arrangement 1.

Which one of the given responses would be a meaningful order of the following? (i) Earth (ii) Jupiter (iii)Venus (iv) Mars (v) Mercury a) v, iii, i, ii, iv b) v, iii, iv, i, ii c) v, iii, i, iv, ii d) v, iii, ii, iv, i e) None of these

Arrange the words given below in a meaningful sequence. 2.

(i) Key (ii) Door (iii) Lock (iv) Room (v) Switch on a) v, i, ii, iv, iii b) iv, ii, i, v, iii d) i, iii, ii, iv, v e) None of these

c) i, ii, iii, v, iv

3.

(i) Windows (ii) Walls (iii) Floor (iv) Foundation (v) Roof (vi) Room a) iv, v, iii, ii, i, vi b) iv, iii, v, vi, ii, i c) iv, ii, i, v, iii, vi d) iv, i, v, vi, ii, iii e) None of these

4.

(i) District (ii) Village (iii) State (iv) Block a) ii, i, iv, iii b) ii, iii, iv, i d) iii, ii, i, iv e) None of these

c) ii, iv, i, iii

(i) Site (ii) Plan (iii) Rent (iv) Money (v) Building a) iv, i, ii, v, iii b) iii, iv, ii, v, i d) i, ii, iii, v, iv e) None of these

c) ii, iii, v, i, iv

(i) Cut (ii) Put on (iii) Mark (iv) Measure (v) Tailor a) iv, iii, i, v, ii b) iii, i, v, iv, ii d) i, iii, ii, iv, v e) None of these

c) ii, iv, iii, i, v

(i) Mother (ii) Child (iii) Milk (iv) Cry (v) Smile a) i, v, ii, iv, iii b) ii, iv, i, iii, v d) iii, ii, i, v, iv e) None of these

c) ii, iv, iii, i, v

5.

6.

7.

8.

(i) Word (ii) Paragraph (iii) Sentence (iv) Letters (v) Phrase a) iv, i, v, ii, iii b) iv, i, iii, v, ii c) iv, ii, v, i, iii 191

REASONING MADE EASY

d) iv, i, v, iii, ii


e) None of these

9.

(i) Caste (ii) Family (iii) Newly married couple (iv) Clan (v) species a) ii, iii, i, iv, v b) iii, iv, v, i, ii c) iii, ii, i, iv, v d) iv, v, iii, ii, i e) None of these

10.

(i) Elephant (ii) Cat (iii) Mosquito (iv) Tiger (v) Whale a) v, iii, i, ii, iv b) iii, ii, iv, i, v c) i, iii, v, iv, ii d) ii, v, i, iv, iii e) None of these

11.

(i) Protect (ii) Pressure (iii) Relief (iv) Rain (v) Flood a) ii, iv, iii, i, v b) ii, iv, v, i, iii d) iii, ii, iv, v, i e) None of these

c) ii, v, iv, i, iii

(i) Rainbow (ii) Rain (iii) Sun (iv) Happy (v) Child a) iv, ii, iii, v, i b) ii, iii, i, v, iv d) ii, i, iv, v, iii e) None of these

c) iv, v, i, ii, iii

12.

13.

(i) Patients (ii) Diagnosis (iii) Bill (iv) Doctor (v) Treatment a) i, iv, iii, ii, v b) i, iv, ii, v, iii c) i, iv, ii, iii, v d) i, ii, iii, iv, v e) None of these

14.

(i) Table (ii) Tree (iii) Wood (iv) Seed (v) Plant a) i, ii, iii, iv, v b) iv, v, iii, ii, i d) iv, v, ii, iii, i e) None of these

c) I, iii, ii, iv, v

15.

(i) Doctor (ii) Fever (iii) Prescribe (iv) Diagnose (v) Medicine a) ii, iv, iii, v, i b) i, iv, iii, ii, v c) ii, i, iii, iv, v d) ii, i, iv, iii, v e) None of these

16.

(i) Index (ii) Contents (iii) Title (iv) Chapters (v) Introduction a) iii, ii, v, i, iv b) ii, iii, iv, v, i c) iii, ii, v, iv, i d) v, I, iv, ii, iii e) None of these

17.

(i) Book (ii) Pulp (iii) Timber (iv) Jungle (v) Pape a) iii, ii, v, i, iv b) iv, iii, ii, v, i d) v, iv, iii, i, ii e) None of these

c) ii, v, i, iv, iii

18.

(i) College (ii) Child (iii) Salary (iv) School (v) Employment a) iv, i, iii, v, ii b) i, ii, iv, iii, v c) ii, iv, i, v, iii d) v, iii, ii, i, iv e) None of these

19.

(i) Study (ii) Job (iii) Examination (iv) Earn (v) Apply a) i, iii, v, ii, iv b) i, iii, ii, v, iv c) i, ii, iii, iv, v d) i, iii, v, iv, ii e) None of these 192

REASONING MADE EASY

20.


(i) Frog (ii) Eagle (iii) Grasshopper (iv) Snake (v) Grass a) v, iii, i, iv, ii b) i, iii, v, ii, iv c) v, iii, iv, ii, i d) iii, iv, ii, v, i e) None of these

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Option B Option D Option C Option C Option D Option A Option C Option D Option C Option B Option B Option B Option B Option D Option D Option C Option B Option C Option A Option A

193

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 14 Mathematical Operations 1.

If Q’ means +’, T’ means ⎯’, R’ means ÷’ and K’ means ×’ then 2 4 R 4 Q 8 K 6 T 10 = ? a) 48 b) 24 c) 44 d) 2/3 e) None of these

2.

If ÷’ denotes ⎯’, ×’ denotes +’, ⎯’ denotes ×’ and +’ denotes ÷’ then 28 × 12 + 4 ÷ 6 ⎯ 4 = ? a) 4 b) 1 c) 6 d) 5 e) None of these

3.

If +’ means ÷’, ⎯’ means ×’, ÷’ means ⎯’ and ×’ means +’ then 42 ÷ 24 + 6 × 4 ⎯ 3 = ? a) 22-3/4 b) 50 c) 58 d) 26 e) None of these

4.

Which of the following interchange of signs would make the given equation correct? (6 + 3) + (4 × 7) = 29 a) + and ⎯ b) ÷ and + c) × and + d) ÷ and × e) None of these

5.

Change the sign to find the equation 28 ⎯ 7 + 2 × 2 = 0 a) Change + into × b) Change × into + c) Change ⎯ into + d) Change + into ⎯ e) None of these

6.

9 ÷ 5 ÷ 4 ⎯3 × 2 = ? a) 2 d) 3

7.

If + means ÷ , × means ⎯, ÷ means × and ⎯ means +, then 8 + 6 × 4 ÷ 3 ⎯ 4 =? a) ⎯ 12 b) ⎯ 20/3 c) 12 d) 20/3 e) None of these

8.

If × means ÷ , ⎯ means ×, ÷ means + and + means ⎯, then 3 ⎯ 15 ÷ 19 × 8 + 6=? a) 8 b) 4 c) 2 d) ⎯1 e) None of these

b) ⎯ 9 e) None of these

c) ⎯ 3

194

REASONING MADE EASY


9.

When 1100010 is divided by 0101, what will be the decimal remainder? a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 6 e) None of these

10.

How many basic binary subtraction combinations are possible? a) 4 b) 3 c) 2 d) 1 e) None of these

11.

When multiplying in binary the decimal values 13 × 11, what is the third partial product? a) 100000 b) 100001 c) 0000 d) 1011 e) None of these

12.

If × stands for addition’, ÷ stands for subtraction’, + stands for multiplication’ and ⎯ stands for division’, then 20 × 8 ÷ 8 ⎯ 4 + 2 = ? a) 80 b) 25 c) 24 d) 5 e) None of these

Answers: 1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Option C Option E 28 × 12 + 4 ÷ 6 ⎯ 4 = ? ? = 28 + 12 ÷ 4 ⎯ 6 × 4 ? = 28 + 12/4 ⎯ 6 × 4 ? = 28 + 3 ⎯ 24 ?= 7 Option B ? = 42 ÷ 24 + 6 × 4 ⎯ 3 = 42 ⎯ 24 ÷ 6 + 4 × 3 = 42 ⎯ 24/6 + 12 = 42 ⎯ 4 + 12 = 50 Option C (6 + 3) + (4 × 7) = 29 (6 × 3) + (4 + 7) = 29 18 + 11 = 29 Option A 28 ⎯ 7 + 2 × 2 = 0 28 ⎯ 7 × 2 × 2 = 0 28 ⎯ 28 = 0 Option E 9 ⎯ 5 × 4 ÷ 3 ÷ 2 = 9 ⎯ 5 × 4 ÷ 3/2 = ⎯ 19/2 195

REASONING MADE EASY


7.

Option B

8.

Option C

9.

Option B

10.

Option A

11.

Option A

12.

Option C 20 + 8 ⎯ 8 ÷ 4 × 2 = 20 + 8 ⎯ 2 × 2 = 20 + 8 ⎯ 4 = 24

196

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 15 Odd Man Out Series 1.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to the group? a) PS b) FI c) AD d) KN e) GD

2.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to the group? a) 23 b) 29 c) 37 d) 39 e) 31

3.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to the group? a) Yellow b) Blue c) Pink d) Green e) Red

4.

Four of the following are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) Table b) Chair c) Bench d) Desk e) Wood

5.

Four of the following are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that d oes not belong to that group? a) 27 b) 64 c) 125 d) 216 e) 384

6.


7.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the o ne that does not belong to that group? a) Sweet b) Cake c) Pastry d) Bread e) Biscuit

8.


197

REASONING MADE EASY


9.

Four of the following five are a like in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) VT b) MK c) DB d) KH e) XV

10.


Directions (Q. 11-19) In each of the following questions, select the one which is different from the other three responses. 11.

a) Aptitude d) Behaviour

b) Altitude e) None of these

c) Attitude

12.

a) SSA d) NASA

b) RMSA e) None of these

c) RUSA

13.

a) 63 d) 66


c) 65

14.

a) 108 d) 225


c) 144

15.

187 : 11 d) 224 : 14

b) 194 : 12 e) None of these

c) 195 : 13

16.

a) D d) J

b) G e) None of these

c) H

17.

a) SRT d) VUW

b) PON e) None of these

c) KJL

18.

a) EVFU d) GTHS

b) CXDW e) None of these

c) AZBX

19.

a) Square b) Equilateral Triangle c) Rhombus d) Right Angle Triangle

20.

Four of the following five are alike in a cretain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) 21 b) 35 c) 42 d) 56 e) 49 198

REASONING MADE EASY


21.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group? a) Table b) Desk c) Wardrobe d) Computer e) Chair

22.

Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group. Which is one that does not belong to that group? a) Orange b) Apple c) Guava d) Papaya e) Mango

23.

Find the odd one out. a) January, May b) April, June c) July, August d) January, December e) None of these

Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Option E Option D Option C Option E Option E Option C Apart from 45, sum of both digits of every number will be an even number but 45 = 4 + 5 = 9 which is an odd number.

7.

Option A

8. 9. 10.

11.

Except sweet’ all the other are baked items. Option B 27 is the cube of 3 Option D Option E 289 = 17 × 17 So, 289 is a perfect square. Option B

Altitude means the height above sea l evel. Except altitude, all other words imply human nature and mental status. 12.

Option C 199

REASONING MADE EASY


SSA ⟶ ASS (An Animal) RMSA ⟶ MARS (A Planet) NASA ⟶ American Space Agency 13.

Option D Except 66, all others are odd numbers.

14.

Option B The number 91 is a product of two prime numbers. 13 × 7 = 91

15.

Option B

16.

Except in the number pair 194-12, in all other number pairs the first number is completely divisible by the second number. 187/11 = 17; 195/13 = 15; 224/14 = 16 But, 194/12 = 16.166 Option B D ⟶ position number 4 H ⟶ position number 8 J ⟶ position number 10 G ⟶ position number 7 (An odd number)

17. 18. 19.

20. 21. 22. 23.

Option B Option C Option D Except in the case of right angle triangle, in all other geometrical figures, all the sides are equal. Option E The number of 49 is a perfect square of a natural number. Option D Computer is a mechanical device. All others are wooden items. Option A Orange is citrus fruit. Optoin B Except the months of April and June, all other months have 31 days each.

200

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 16 Ranking Based Problems 1.

In a row of 35 children, M is 15th from the right end and there are 10 children between M and R. What is R’s position from the left end of the row? th th th a) 15 b) 5 c) 30 d) Data inadequate e) None of the above

2.

Among B, F, J, K and W each having a different weight, F is heavier than only J. B I s heavier than F and W but not as h eavy as K. Who among them is the third heaviest among them? a) B b) F c) K d) W e) None of these

3.

J, D, L, H and F each travelling to station, each one reaches at a different time. L reaches only after J and D reaches only before F. Who amongst them is 3rd to reach? a) F b) L c) D d) Cannot be determined e) None of these

4.

In a queue, Amrita is 10th from the front while Mukul is 25 th from behind and Mamta is just in the middle of the two. If there be 50 persons in the queue. What position does Mamta occupy from the front? a) 20th b) 19th c) 18th d) 17th e) None of these

5.

Some boys are sitting in a row. P is sitting 14th from the left and Q is 7th from the right. If there are four boys between P and Q. How many boys are there in the row? a) 25 b) 23 c) 21 d) 19 e) None of these

6.

Standing on a platform, Amit told Sunita that Aligarh was more than 10 kilometers but less than 15 kilometers from there. Sunita knew that it was more than 12 but less than 14 kilometers from there. If both of them were correct, which of the following could be the distance of Aligarh from the platform? a) 11 km b) 12 km c) 13 km d) 14 km e) 15 km

7.

The train for Lucknow leaves every two and a half hours from New Delhi Railway Station. An announcement was made at the station that the train for Lucknow had left 40 minutes ago and the next train will leave at 18.00 hrs. At what time was the announcement made? 201

REASONING MADE EASY

a) 15.30 hrs. hrs. d) 15.50 hrs.


b) 17.10 hrs.

c)

16.00

e) None of these

8.

How many 6’s are there in the following series of numbers which are preceded by 7 but not immediately followed by 9? 6795697687678694677695763 a) One b) Two c) Three d) Four e) None of these

9.

How many 7’s are there in the following sequence which are preceded by 9 and followed by 6? 7897653428972459297647 a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5 e) None of these

10.

How many 6’s are there in the following number sequence which are immediately preceded by 9 but not immediately followed by 4? 5 6 4 3 2 9 6 3 1 6 4 9 6 4 21 5 9 6 7 2 1 4 7 4 9 6 4 2 a) One b) Two c) Three d) Four e) More than four

11.

51473985726315863852243496 How many odd numbers are there in the sequence which are immediately preceded and also immediately followed by an even number? a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4 e) More than 4

12.

The letters L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S and T in their order are substituted by nine integers 1 to 9 but not in that order. 4 is assigned to P. The difference between P and T is 5. The difference between N and T is 3. What is the integer asigned to N? a) 4 b) 5 c) 6 d) 7 e) None of these

Answers: 1. 2.

3.

4.

Option D Option D K>B>W>F>J So, W is the third heaviest. Option E J >L > H>D >F H is 3rd to reach. Option C 202

REASONING MADE EASY

5.

Option A

6.

Option C

7.

Option E

8.

Option C

9.

Option A

10.

Option B

11.

Option D

12.

Option C


203

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 17 Arithmatic Reasoning 1. The total of the ages of Amar, Akbar and Anthony is 80 years. What was the total of their ages three years ago? a) 71 years b) 72 years c) 74 years d) 77 years e) None of these 2. A woman says, “If you reverse my own age, the figures represent my husband’s age. He is, of course, senior to me and the difference between our ages is one-eleventh of their sum.” The woman’s age is a) 23 years b) 34 years c) 45 years d) Can’t be determined e) None of these 3. In a garden, there are 10 rows and 12 coloumns of mango trees. The distance between the two trees is 2 metres and a distance of one metre is left from all sides of the boundary of the garden. The length of the garden is a) 20 m b) 22 m c) 24 m d) 26 m e) None of these 4. A motorist knows four different routes from Bristol to Birmingham. From Birmingham to Shefield he knows three different routes and from Sheffield to Carlisle he knows two different routes. How many routes does he know from Bristol to Carlisle? a) 4 b) 8 c) 12 d) 24 e) None of these 5. If 100 cats kill 100 mice in 100 days, then 4 cats would kill 4 mice in how many days? a) 1 day b) 4 days c) 40 days d) 100 days e) None of these 6. Five bells begin to toll together and toll respectively at intervals of 6, 5, 7, 10 and 12 seconds. How many times will they toll togethe in one hour excluding the one at the start? a) 7 times b) 8 times c) 9 times d) 11 times e) None of these 7. Today is Varun’s birthday. One year, from today he will be twice as old as he was 12 years ago. How old is Varun today? a) 20 years b) 22 years c) 25 years d) 27 years e) None of these 204

REASONING MADE EASY


8. When Rahul was born, his father was 32 years older than his brother and his mother was 25 years older than his sister. If Rahul’s brother is 6 years oldern than him and his mother is 3 years younger than his father, how old was Rahul’s sister when he was born? a) 7 years b) 10 years c) 14 years d) 19 years e) None of these 9. A shepherd had 17 sheep. All but nine died. How many was he left with a) Nil b) 8 c) 9 d) 17 e) None of these 10. The total number of digits used in numbering the pages of a book having 366 pages is a) 732 b) 990 c) 1098 d) 1305 e) None of these 11. A student got twice as many sums wrong as he got right. If he attempted 48 sums in all, how did he solve correctly? a) 12 b) 16 c) 18 d) 24 e) None of these 12. A father tells his son, “I was of your present age when you were born.” If the father is 36 now, how old was the boy five years back? a) 13 b) 15 c) 17 d) 20 e) None of these 13. Find the number which when added to itself 13 times, gives 112 a) 7 b) 8 c) 9 d) 11 e) None of these 14. At the end of a business conference the ten people present all shake hands with each other once. How many handshakes will there be altogether? a) 20 b) 45 c) 55 d) 90 e) None of these 15. A group of 1200 persons consisting of captains and soldiers is travelling in a train. For every 15 soldiers there is one captain. The number of captains in the group is a) 85 b) 80 c) 75 d) 70 e) None of these 16. A placed three sheets with two carbons to get two extra copies of the original. Then he decided to get more carbon copies and folded the paper in such a way that the upper half of the sheets were on top of the lower half. Then he typed. How many carbon copies did he get? 205

REASONING MADE EASY

a) 1 d) 4



c) 3

17. Aruna cut a cake into two halves and cuts one half into smaller pieces of equal size. Each of the small pieces is 20 grams in weight. If she has seven pieces of the cake in all with her, how heavy was the original cake? a) 240 gm b) 220 gm c) 225 gm d) 250 gm e) None of these 18. The number of boys in a class is three times the number of girls. Which one of the following numbers cannot represent the total number of children in the class? a) 48 b) 44 c) 42 d) 40 e) None of these 19. In a group of 15 people, 7 read French, 8 read English while 3 of them read none of these two. How many of them read French and English both? a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5 e) None of these 20. A tailor had a number of shirt pieces to cut from a roll of fabric. He cut each roll of equal length into 10 pieces. He cut at the rate of 45 cuts a minute. How many rolls would be cut in 24 minutes? a) 30 rolls b) 58 rolls c) 120 rolls d) 150 rolls e) None of these 21. There are deer and peacocks in a zoo. By counting heads they are 80. The number of their legs is 200. How many peacocks are there? a) 10 b) 20 c) 40 d) 60 e) None of these 22. A farmer built a fence around his square plot. He used 27 fence poles on each side of the square. How many poles did he need altogether? a) 54 b) 84 c) 104 d) 108 e) None of these 23. I have a few sweets to be distributed. If I keep 2, 3 or 4 in pack, I am left with one sweet. If I keep 5 in a pack, I am left with none. What is the minimum number of sweets I have to pack and distribute? a) 25 b) 35 c) 56 d) 65 e) None of these 24. A man has Rs.480 in the denominations of one rupee notes, five rupee notes and ten rupee notes. The number of each denomination is equal. What is the total number of notes that he has? 206

REASONING MADE EASY

a) 45 d) 120



c) 90

25. A is 3 years older to B and 3 years younger to C, while B and D are twins. How many years older is C and D? a) 3 b) 6 c) 9 d) 12 e) None of these

Answers: 1. Required sum = (80 ⎯ 3 × 3) years = (80 ⎯ 9) years = 71 years 2. Let x and y be the ten’s and unit’s digits respectively of the numeral denoting the woman’s age Then, woman’s age = (10x + y) years, husband’s age = (10y + x) years Therefore (10y + x) ⎯ (10x + y) = (1/11) (10y + x + 10x + y) (9y ⎯ 9x) = (1/11) (11y + 11x) = (x + y) 10x = 8y x = 4/5y Clearly, y should be a single digit multiple of 5, which is 5. Hence, woman’s age = 10x + y = 45 years 3. Each row contains 12 plants. There are 11 gapes between two corner trees (11 × 2) metres and 1 metre on each side is left. Therefore length = (22 + 2)m = 24 m 4. Total number of routes from Bristol to Carlisle = (4 × 3 × 2) = 24 5. Less cats, more days (indirect proportion) Less mice, less days (direct proportion) Let the required number of days be x. Cat 4 : 100 :: x : 100 Mice 100 : 4 100 × 4 × x = 4 × 100 × 100 or x = 4 × 100 × 100 / 100 × 4 = 100 6. L.C.M. of 6, 5, 7, 10 and 12 is 420 So, the bells will toll together after every 420 seconds i.e. 7 minutes. Now, 7 × 8 = 56 and 7 × 9 = 63 Thus, in 1 hour (or 60 minutes), the bells will toll together 8 times, excluding the one at the start. 7. Let Varun’s age today = x years Then, Varun’s age after 1 year = x + 1 years Therefore, x + 1 = 2 (x ⎯ 12) x + 1 = 2x ⎯ 24 207

REASONING MADE EASY


x = 25 8. When Rahul was born, his brother’s age = 6 years, his father’s age = 6 + 32 years = 38 years, his mother’s age = 38 ⎯ 3 = 35 years, his sister’s age = 35 ⎯ 25 = 10 years 9. All but nine died’ means All except nine died’ i.e. 9 sheep remained alive. 10. Total number of digits = (Number of digits in 1 ⎯ digit page numbers + number of digits in 2 ⎯ digit page numbers + number of digits in 3 ⎯ digit page numbers = (1 × 9 + 2 × 90 + 3 × 267) = (9 + 180 + 801) = 990 11. Suppose the boy got x sums right and 2x sums wrong. Then, x + 2x = 48 3x = 48 x = 16 12. Let the father’s age be x and the son’s age be y. Then, x ⎯ y = y or x = 2y Now, x = 36, So, 2y = 36 or y = 18 Therefore Son’s present age = 18 years So, son’s age 5 years ago = 13 years 13. Let the number be x. Then x + 13x = 112 14x = 112 x=8 14. Total number of handshakes = 9 + 8 + 7 + 6 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 1 = 45 15. Out of every 16 persons, there is one captain, so, number of captains 1200/16 = 75 16. Since the number of carbons is 2, only two copies can be obtained. 17. Seven pieces consist of 6 smaller equal pieces and one half cake piece. Weight of each small piece = 20 gm So, total weight of the cake = 2 (20 × 6) = 240 gm 18. Let number of girls = x and number of boys = 3x Then, 3x + x = 4x = total number of students Thus, to find exact value of x, the total number of students must be divisible by 4 19. Option B 208

REASONING MADE EASY

20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.


Option C Option D Option C Option A Option C Option B

209

REASONIN MADE EASY


Cha ter – 18 Classification Directions (Q. 1-5): In each of the foll wing questions, five words have been given out of which four are alike in some m nne, while 5th one is different. Choose the word which is different from the rest. 1. Choose the word which is different from the rest a) Chicken b) Snake d) Crocodile e) Frog

c) Swan

2. Choose the word which is different from the rest a) Cap b) Turban d) Veil e) Hat

c) Helmet

3. Choose the word which is different from the rest a) Kiwi b) Eagl d) Ostrich

c) Emu

4. Choose the word which is different from the rest a) Rigveda b) Yajurveda d) Ayurveda e) Samveda

c) Atharvaveda

5. Choose the word which is different from the rest a) Curd b) Butt r d) Cheese e) Cream

c) Oil

Directions (Q. 6-10): Out of the five f gures marked (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5), four are similar in a certain manner. How ver, one figure is not like the other four. Choose the figure which is different fro the rest. 6. Choose the figure which is different from the rest.

(1) a) 1 d) 4

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) b) 2 e) 5

c) 3

7. Choose the figure which is different from the rest.

(1) a) 1

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) b) 2

c) 3 210

REASONIN MADE EASY

d) 4


e) 5


(1) a) 1 d) 4

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) b) 2 e) 5

c) 3


(1) a) 1 d) 4

(2)

(3)

(4)

5) b) 2 e) 5

c) 3


(1) a) 1 d) 4

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) b) 2 e) 5

c) 3

Directions (Q. 11-15): In each of the following questions, five words have been given out of which four are alike in so e manner, while 5th one is different. Choose the word which is different from the res . 11. Choose the word which is different from the rest a) Pear b) Apple d) Guava e) Orange 12. Choose the word which is different from the rest a) Dagger b) Hammer d) Sword e) Blade

c) Litchi

c) Knife

13. Choose the word which is different from the rest a) Kanpur b) Allahabad d) Mathura

c) Varanasi

14. Choose the word which is different from the rest a) Oyster b) Clam d) Mussel

c) Scallop

15. Choose the word which is different from the rest 211

REASONIN MADE EASY

a) Deck d) Bow

b) Qua e) Mast


c) Stern

Directions (Q. 16-20): Out of the five f gures marked (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5), four are similar in a certain manner. However, one figure is not like the other four. Choose the figure which is different fro the rest. 16. Choose the figure which is different from the rest.

(1) a) 1 d) 4

(2)

(3)

(4)

5) b) 2 e) 5

c) 3


(1) a) 1 d) 4

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) b) 2 e) 5

c) 3


(1) a) 1 d) 4

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) b) 2 e) 5

c) 3


(1) a) 1 d) 4

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) b) 2 e) 5

c) 3


(1) a) 1 d) 4

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) b) 2 e) 5

c) 3

212

REASONING MADE EASY


Answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Option A Option D Option B Option D Option C Option A Option E Option D Option B Option B Option E Option B Option D Option C Option B Option D Option C Option C Option D Option C

213

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 19 Dice Problem 1. Which symbol will be on the face opposite to the face with symbol *

a) @ d) +

b) $ e) None of these

c) 8

2. Two positions of a dice are shown below. When number 1’ on the top. What number will be at the bottom? a) 3 b) 5 c) 2 d) 6 e) None of these 3. From the four positions of a dice given below, find the colour which is opposite to yellow? a) Violet b) Red c) Rose d) Blue e) None of these 4. From the positions of a cube are shown below, which letter will be on the face opposite to face with A’? a) D b) B c) C d) F e) None of these 5. Which digit will appear on the face opposite to the face with number 4?

a) 3 d) 2/3


c) 6

6. Which number is on the face opposite to 6?

a) 4 d) 3


c) 2

214

REASONING MADE EASY


7. When the digit 5 is on the bottom then which number will be on its upper surface?

a) 1 d) 6


c) 4

8. Observe the dots on the dice (one to six dots) in the following figures. How many dots are contained on the face opposite to the containing four dots?

a) 2 d) 6


c) 5

9. Four usual dice are thrown on the ground. The total of number on the top faces of these four dice is 13 as the top faces showed 4, 3, 1 and 5 respectively. What is the total of the faces touching the ground? a) 12 b) 13 c) 15 d) Can’t be determined e) None of these 10. A dice is numbered from 1 to 6 in different ways. If 1 is opposite to 5 and 2 is opposite to 3, then a) 4 is adjacent to 3 and 6 b) 2 is adjacent to 4 and 6 c) 4 is adjacent to 5 and 6 d) 6 is adjacent to 3 and 4 11. Which symbol will be on the face opposite to the face with symbol C?

a) D d) F

b) E e) None of these

c) B or D

12. Which number is on the face opposite to 56? 215

REASONING MADE EASY


a) 54 b) 55 d) Can’t be determined e) None of these

c) 50

13. If there are five dots at the bottom, then how many dots will be on its upper surface?

a) 1 d) 4


c) 3

14. Two positions of dice are shown below. What will be on the top when B’ is at bottom?

a) F d) E

b) D e) None of these

c) A

15. Two positions of dice are shown below. What number will appear on the opposite to the face containing 5’?

a) 2 d) 6


c) 1

216

REASONING MADE EASY


16. Two positions of a cube with surfaces are shown below. When the surface D’ touch the bottom, what surface will be on top?

a) D d) F

b) A e) None of these

c) B

17. Two positions of a dice are shown below. When C’ is at the bottom then what is on top?

a) A d) D

b) B e) None of these

c) C

18. Which digit will appear on the face opposite to the face with alphabet d’?

a) a d) f

b) g e) None of these

c) c

19. Two positions of a cube are shown below. When the surface D’ touch the bottom, what surface will be on the top?

217

REASONING MADE EASY


a) B b) C d) Can’t be determined e) None of these

c) E

20. How many dot/dots will appear on the face opposite to the face with Four Dots’?

a) 3 dots d) 5 dots

b) 2 dots e) None of these

c) 1 dot

Answers: 1. Option C The symbols of the adjacent faces to the face with symbol * are @, -, + and $. Hence the required symbol is 8. 2. Option B According to the rule (2) when one’ is at the top, then 5 will be at the bottom. 3. Option A The colours adjacent to yellow are orange, blue, red and rose. Hence violet will be opposite to yellow. 4. Option A The letters of the adjacent faces to the face with letter A, are B, F, C and E. Hence D is the letter of the face opposite to the face with letters (A). 5. Option A Here the common faces with number 3, are in same positions. Hence 6 is opposite to 2 and 5 is opposite to 1. Therefore 4 is opposite to 3. 6. Option B As the numbers 2, 3, 4 and 5 are adjacent to 6. Hence the number on the face opposite to 6 is 1. 7. Option A According to the rule No.3, common faces with number 2 are in same positions. Hence when the digit 5 is on the bottom then 1 will on the upper surface.

218

REASONING MADE EASY


8. Option A 9. Option C In a usual dice, the sum of the numbers on any two opposite faces is always 7. Thus, 1 is opposite 6, 2 is opposite 5 and 3 is opposite 4. Consequently, when 4, 3, 1 and 5 are the numbers on the top faces, then 3, 4, 6 and 2 respectively are the numbers on the face touching the ground. The total of these numbers = 3 + 4 + 6 + 2 = 15 10. Option B If 1 is opposite to 5 and 2 is opposite to 3, then 4 definitely lies opposite to 6. Therefore, 2 cannot lie opposite to any of the two numbers – 4 or 6. Hence, 2 necessarily lies adjacent to both 4 and 6. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Option D Option E Option A Option B Option B Option B Option E Option C Option E Option A

219

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 20 Statement and Arguments Directions (Q. 1-5): Each question given below consists of a statement, followed by two arguments numbered I and II. You have to decide which of the arguments is a strong argument and which is a weak argument. Give answer: a) If only argument I is strong b) If only argument II is strong c) If either I or II is strong d) If neither I nor II is strong e) If both I and II are strong 1. Statement: Should India encourage exports, when most things are insufficient for internal use itself? Arguments: I. Yes, we have to earn foreignexchange to pay for our imports. II. No, even selective encouragement would lead to shortages. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 2. Statement: Should all the drugs patented and manufactured in Western countries be first tried out on sample basis before giving licence for sale to general public in India? Arguments: I. Yes, many such drugs require different doses and duration for Indian population and hence it is necessary. II. No, this is just not feasible and hence cannot be implemented. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 3. Statement: Should India make efforts to harness solar energy to fulfil its energy requirements? Arguments: I. Yes, most of the energy sources used at present is exhaustible. II. No, harnessing solar energy requires a lot of capital, which India lacks in. 220



a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 4. Statement: Should there be students union in college/university? Arguments: I. No, No, thi thiss wi will cre create ate a politi liticcal atmo tmosph sphere ere in in th the cam camp pus. II. II. Yes, Yes, it it is is ver very y nec neces essa sary ry stu student dentss are are futu future re po politi litica call lead leader ers. s. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argume argument nt II is strong strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 5. Statement: Should India give away Kashmir to Pakistan? Arguments: I. No, No, Kas Kashm hmir ir is a bea beaut utif ifu ul Sta State te.. It It ear earn ns a lot lot of of ffor orei eig gn exc excha hang ngee for India. II. Yes, th this would help settl ttle conflict icts. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong

Directions (Q. 6-10): Each question given below consists of a statement, followed by two arguments numbered I and II. You have to decide which of the arguments is a strong argument and which is a weak argument. Give answer: a) If only only arg argumen umentt I is is str stron ong g b) If only only argu argume ment nt II is stro strong ng c) If eith either er I or or IIII is is str stron ong g d) If neit neithe herr I nor nor IIII is is stro strong ng e) If both both I and and II are are str stron ong g 6. Statement: Should there be an upper age limit of 65 years for contesting Parliamentary/Legislative Parliamentary/Legislative Assembly elections? Arguments: I. Yes, Yes, gener eneral ally ly peop people le abov abovee the the age age of of 65 65 los losee the their ir dyna dynam mism ism and and will power. II. II. No, No, the the life life span span is so incr increa ease sed d that that peop people le remai remain n phy physi sica call lly y and and mentally active even upto the age of 80. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng 221


b) c) d) e)


Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng Both Bo th I and and II are are str stron ong g

7. Statement: Should new big big industries be started in Mumbai? Mumbai? Arguments: I. Yes, it will create job opportunities. II. No, No, it it wil willl fu furth rther add add to to po pollu llutio tion of of th the ci city. ty. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Both I and and II are are stro trong 8. Statement: Should high chimneys be installed in industries? Arguments: I. Yes, it reduces pollutio tion at ground level. II. No, No, it it in increa reases pollu olluti tio on in in upp upper er atm atmosphe sphere re.. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 9. Statement: Does India need so many plans for development? Arguments: I. Yes Yes, no nothin hing can can be ach achie iev ved with ithout prop roper plann lannin ing g. II. II. No, No, too too much uch tim time, e, money oney and and en energ ergy is is was waste ted d on on pla plann nnin ing g. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g 10. Statement: Should articles of only deserving authors be allowed to be published? Arguments: I. Yes Yes, it it wi will sav save a lot lot of of pa paper per wh which ich is in sho short rep reply. ly. II. II. No, No, it it is is not not poss possib ible le to draw draw a lin line bet betwe ween en the the des deser erv ving ing and and the the undeserving. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g 222



Directions (Q. 11-15): Each question given given below consists consists of a statement, followed followed by two arguments numbered I and II. You have to decide which of the arguments is a strong argument and which is a wweak argument. Give answer: a) If only only arg argumen umentt I is is str stron ong g b) If only only argu argume ment nt II is stro strong ng c) If eith either er I or II is stro stron ng d) If neit neithe herr I nor nor IIII is is stro strong ng e) If both both I and and II are are str stron ong g 11. Statement: Should all the unauthorized structures in the city be demolished? Arguments: I. No, No, whe where re will ill th the peo peopl plee resid esidin ing g in such hou houses ses liv live? e? II. II. Yes, Yes, this this will will giv give a clea clearr mes messa sag ge to gener eneral al publ public ic and and the they y will will refrain from constructing unauthorized unauthorized buildings. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g 12. Statement: Should there there be a maximum maximum limit limit for the number number of ministers ministers in the Central Government? Government? Arguments: I. No, No, the the poli politi tica call par party ty in power ower shou should ld hav have the the free freed dom to deci decide de the number of ministers to be appointed. II. II. Yes, Yes, the the num numbe berr of of min minis iste ters rs shou should ld be res restr tric icte ted d to to a cer certa tain in percentage of of the total number number of seats in the Parliament Parliament to avoid unncessary expenditure. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g 13. Statement: Should foreign films be banned in India? Arguments: I. Yes, Yes, they they depi depict ct an alie alien n cu cultur lturee whi which ch adve advers rsel ely y aff affec ects ts our our val valu ues. es. II. No, No, ffo oreig eign fi films lms are are of a high igh art artis isti ticc st standa andard rd.. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng 223



e) Both I and and II II are are st stron rong 14. Statement: Is buying things on installments profitable to the customer? Arguments: I. Yes, he has to pay less. II. II. No, No, payi paying ng inst instal allm lmen ents ts upse upsets ts the the fam family ily budg budget et.. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor IIII is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g 15. Statement: Should Doordarshan be given autonomous status? Arguments: I. Yes, Yes, it will will help elp Doo Doord rdar arsh shan an to hav have fai fairr and and impa impart rtia iall cov cover erag agee of of all important events. II. No, No, th the cov cover erag agee of of ev events ents will ill be be de decid cided by a few few wh who may may not have healthy outlook. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g

Directions Directions (Q. 16-20): 16-20): Each question given below consists of a statement, followed by two arguments numbered numbered I and II. You have to decide which of the arguments arguments is a strong argument and which is a weak argument. Give answer: a) If only only arg argumen umentt I is is str stron ong g b) If only only argu argume ment nt II is stro strong ng c) If eith either er I or or IIII is is str stron ong g d) If neit neithe herr I nor nor IIII is is stro strong ng e) If both both I and and II are are str stron ong g 16. Statement: Should Government jobs in rural areas have more incentives? Arguments: I. Yes, Yes, ince incen ntiv tives are are ess essen enti tial al for for att attra ract ctin ing g gover overnm nmen entt ser serv vants ants there. II. II. No, No, rur rural al area areass are are alre alread ady y chea cheape per, r, heal health thie ierr and and less less comp comple lex x than than big cities. So? Why Why offer extra extra incentives. incentives. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g 224



17. Statement: Should there be a cap on maximum number of contestants for Parliamentary elections in any constituency? constituency? Arguments: I. Yes, Yes, this this will will make ake the the Parl Parlia iam menta entary ry elec electi tion onss mor moree mea meani ning ngfu full as as the voters can make a considered judgment judgment for casting their vote. II. II. No, No, in in a dem democ ocra racy cy any any pers person on fulf fulfil illi ling ng the the eli eligi gibi bili lity ty crite criteria ria can can contest Parliamentary elections and there should be no restrictions. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g 18. Statement: Should so much money be spent on advertisements? Arguments: I. Yes, Yes, it is an esse essent ntia iall conc conco omitan itantt in a capi capita tali list st econ econo omy. II. No, it it le leads to to wa wastage of of rreesources. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g 19. Statement: Should all the legislators be forced to resign from their profession? Arguments: I. Yes Yes, th they will will be ab able to devote more tim time fo for th the co countr untry y. II. No, no nobody will co contest el election. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng e) Bo Both th I and and II are are str stron ong g 20. Statement: Should computer knowledge be made a compulsory subject for all the students at secondary school level? Arguments: I. No, No, ou our nee need d is is bre bread ad for for ev every eryone, we can canno nott fo follo llow wes weste terrn models. II. Yes Yes, we can cannot co compete pete in the the inte intern rnat atio ion nal mark arket with withou outt equipping our children with computers. a) Only Only argu argum ment ent I is stro strong ng b) Only Only argu argum ment ent II is str stron ong g c) Eith Either er I or or II II is is str stron ong g d) Neit Neithe herr I nor nor II II is is stro strong ng 225

REASONING MADE EASY


e) Both I and II are strong

Directions (Q. 21-25): Each question given below consists of a statement, followed by two arguments numbered I and II. You have to decide which of the arguments is a strong argument and which is a weak argument. Give answer: a) If only argument I is strong b) If only argument II is strong c) If either I or II is strong d) If neither I nor II is strong e) If both I and II are strong 21. Statement: Should religion be banned? Argument: I. Yes, it develops fanaticism in people. II. No, religion binds people together. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 22. Statement: Should India become a permanent member of UN’s Security Council? Arguments: I. Yes, India has emerged as a country which loves peace and amity. II. No, let us first solve problems of our own people like poverty, malnutrition. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 23. Statement: Should fashionable dresses be banned? Arguments: I. Yes, fashions keep changing and hence consumption of cloth increases. No, fashionable clothes are a peson’s self expression and therefore II. his/her fundamental right. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 226

REASONING MADE EASY


24. Statement: Should an organization like UNO be dissolved? Arguments: I. Yes, with cold war coming to an end, such organizations have no role to play. II. No, in the absence of such organizations there may be a World War. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 25. Statement: Should there be no place of interview in selection? Arguments: I. Yes, it is very subjective in assessment. II. No, it is the only instrument to judge candidates motives and personality. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong

Directions (Q. 26-30): Each question given below consists of a statement, followed by two arguments numbered I and II. You have to decide which of the arguments is a strong argument and which is a weak argument. Give answer: a) If only argument I is strong b) If only argument II is strong c) If either I or II is strong d) If neither I nor II is strong e) If both I and II are strong 26. Statement: Should children be legally made responsible to take care of their parents during their old age? Arguments: I. Yes, such matter can only be solved by legal means. II. Yes, only this will bring some relief to poor parents. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 227

REASONING MADE EASY


27. Statement: Should there be reservation in Government jobs for candidates from single child family? Arguments: I. No, this is not advisable as the jobs should be offered to only deserving candidates without any reservation for a particular group. II. Yes, this will help reduce the growing population in India as the parents will be encouraged to adopt single child norm. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 28. Statement: Should higher education be completely stopped for some time? Arguments: I. No, it will hamper the country’s future progress. II. Yes, it will reduce the educated unemployment. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong

29. Statement: Should we scrap the Public Distribution System in India? Arguments: I. Yes, protectionism is over, everyone must get the bread on his/her own. II. Yes, the poor do not get any benefit because of corruption. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 30. Statement: Should India have no military force at all? Arguments: I. No, other countries in the World do not believe in non-violence. II. Yes, many Indian believe in non-violence. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong

228

REASONING MADE EASY


Directions (Q. 31-35): Each question given below consists of a statement, followed by three or four arguments numbered I, II, III and IV. You have to decide which of the arguments is/are strong arguments and which is/are weak arguments and accordingly choose your answer from the alternatives given below each question. 31. Statement: Should people with educational qualification higher than the optimum requirements be debarred from seking jobs? Arguments: I. No, it will further aggrevate the problem of educated unemployment. II. Yes, it creates complexes among employees and affects the work adversely. III. No, this goes against the basic rights of the individuals. IV. Yes, this will increase productivity. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 32. Statement: Should India go in for computerization in all possible sectors? Arguments: I. Yes, it will bring efficiency and accuracy in the work. II. No, it will be an injustice to the monumental human resources which are at present underutilized. III. No, computerization demands a lot of money. We should not waste money on it. IV. Yes, when advanced countries are introducing computers in every field, how can India afford to lag behind? a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 33. Statement: Should all the school teachers be debarred from giving private tuitions? Arguments: I. No, the needy students will be deprived of the expertise of these teachers. II. Yes, this is an injustice to the unemployed educated people who can earn their living by giving tuitions. III. Yes, only then the quality of teaching in schools will improve. IV. Yes, now salary of these teachers is reasonable. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong 229

REASONING MADE EASY


c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 34. Statement: Should education be made compulsory for all children upto the age of 14? Arguments: I. Yes, this will help to eradicate the system of forced employment of these children. II. Yes, this is an effective way to make the entire population educated. III. No, we do not have adequate infrastructure to educate the entire population. IV. Yes, this would increase the standard of living. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong 35. Statement: Should trade unions be banned completely? Arguments: I. Yes, workers can concentrate on production. II. No, this is the only way through which employees can put their demands before the management. III. Yes, employees get their illegal demands fulfilled through these unions. IV. No, trade unions are not banned in other economically advanced countries. a) Only argument I is strong b) Only argument II is strong c) Either I or II is strong d) Neither I nor II is strong e) Both I and II are strong

Answers: 1. Option A Clearly, India can export only the surplus and that which can be saved after fulfilling its own needs, to pay for its imports. Encouragement to export cannot lead to shortages as it shall provide the resources for imports. So, only argument I holds. 2. Option A 230

REASONING MADE EASY


Clearly, health of the citizens is an issue of major concern for the Government. So, a product like drugs, must be first studied and tested in the Indian context before giving licence for its sale. So, only argument I holds strong. 3. Option A 4. Option E The students union formation shall be a step towards giving to students the basic education in the field of politics. However, it shall create the same political atmosphere in the campus. Thus, both the arguments hold strong.

5. Option A India cannot part with a State that is a major foreign exchange earner to it. So, argument I holds strong. Further, giving away a piece of land unconditionally and unreasonably is no solution to settle disputes. So, argument II is vague. 6. Option D The age of a person is no criterion for judging his mental capabilities and administrative qualities. So, none of the arguments holds strong. 7. Option C Opening up of new industries is advantageous in opening more employment avenues, and disadvantageous in that it adds to the pollution. So, either of the arguments holds strong. 8. Option A Pollution at ground level is the most hazardous in the way of being injurious to human and animal life. So, argument I alone holds. 9. Option A Before indulging in new development programme it is much necessary to plan the exact target, policies and their implementation and the allocation of funds which shows the right direction to work. So, argument I holds strong. Also, planning ensures full utilization of available resources and funds and stepwise approach towards the target. So, spending a part of money on it is no wastage. Thus, argument II is not valid. 10. Option B I does not provide a strong reason in support of the statement. Also, it is not possible to analyze the reaally deserving and not deserving. So, argument II holds strong. 11. Option B 231

REASONING MADE EASY


The demolition of unauthorized buildings would teach a lesson to the unscrupulous builders and also serve as a warning for the citizens not to indulge in such activities in the future. This is essential, as unauthorized constructions impose undue burden on the city’s infrastructure. So, only argument II holds strong. 12. Option B There should be some norms regarding the number of ministers in the Government, as more number of ministers would unnecessarily add to the Government expenditure. So, argument II holds strong. Also, giving liberty to the party in power could promote extension of unreasonable favour to some people at the cost of Government funds. So, argument I does not hold. 13. Option D Foreign films depict the alien culture but this only helps in learning more. So, argument I does not hold. Also, the reason stated in argument II is not strong enough in contradicting the ban. So, it also does not hold. 14. Option D In buying things on installments, a customer has to pay more as the interest is also included. So, argument I does not hold. Moreover, one who buys an item on installments maintains his future budget accordingly as he is well acquainted with when and how much he has to pay, beforehand. So, argument II is also not valid. 15. Option A 16. Option A Government jobs in rural areas are underlined with several difficulties. In lieu of these, extra incentives are needed. So, only argument I holds strong. 17. Option E If there were less candidates, the voters would find it easy to make a choice. So, argument I holds. Also, every person satisfying the conditions laid down by the Constitution must be given an opportunity and should not be denied the same just to cut down the number of candidates. So, argument II also holds strong. 18. Option A The advertisements are/the means to introduce people with the produce and its advantages. So, arguments I holds strong. But argument II is vague because advertisements are an investment for better gain and not a wastage. 19. Option A The legislators should surely not be engaged in any other profession because only then will they be able to work with devotion. So, argument I holds. Also, if such a law is enforced, only those people will contest 232

REASONING MADE EASY


elections who are really preparred to work for the country. So, argument II is vague. 20. Option B Now a days, computers have entered all walks of life and children need to be prepared for the same. So, argument II is strong. Argument I holds no relevance. 21. Option C Religion binds people togethe through the name of God and human values. But at the same time it may create differences and ill-will people, So, either of the arguments holds strong. 22. Option A A peace loving nation like India can well join an international forum which seeks to bring different nations on friendly terms with each other. So, argument I holds strong. Argument II highlights a different aspect. The internal peoblems of a nation should not debar it from strengthening international ties. So, argument II is vague. 23. Option B Imposing ban on fashionable dresses will be a restriction on the pesonal choice and hence the right to freedom of an individual. So, only argument II is strong. 24. Option B An organization like UNO is meant to maintain peace all over and will always serve to prevent conflicts between countries. So, its role never ends. So, argument I does not hold. Also, lack of such an organization may in future lead to increased mutual conflicts and international wars, on account of lack of a common platform for mutual discussions. So, argument II holds. 25. Option A Besides interview, there can be other modes of written examination to judge candidates motives. So argument II is not strong enough. However, the interview is a subjective assessment without doubt. So, argument I holds. 26. Option D Taking care of the parents is a moral duty of the children and cannot be thrust upon them legally, nor such a compulsion can ensure good care of the old people, So, none of the arguments holds strong. 27. Option D The Government has already made provisions for reservation of jobs for the economically backward sections, which is a must. So, abolishing the practice of reservation altogether has no meaning. Thus, argument I is 233

REASONING MADE EASY


vague. Also, more reservations would lead to non-recruitment of many more deserving candidates. Besides, such a reservation, if implemented, will cater to the job requirements of only a small section of population and not a major part of it. So, argument II also does not hold strong. 28. Option A Higher education is not the cause of unemployment. Infact, it has created greater job opportunities. So, argument II is vague. Also, higher education promotes the country’s development. So, argument I holds. 29. Option D The Public Distribution System is indeed necessary to provide basic amenities to the economically backward sections of population. So, argument I is vague. Also, if the objectives, of a system are not fulfilled because of corruption, then getting rid of the system is no solution. Instead, efforts should be made to end corruption and extend its benefits to the people for whom it is meant. So, argument II also does not hold. 30. Option D India needs to have military force to defend itself against the threat of other military powers in the World. So, none of the arguments holds strong. 31. Option D The issue discussed in the statement is nowhere related to increase in unemployment, as the number of vacancies filled in will remain the same. Also, in a working place, it is the peformance of the individual that matters and that makes him more or less wanted, and not his educational qualifications. So, neither I nor II holds strong. Besides, the needs of a job are laid down in the desired qualifications for the job. So, recruitment of more qualified people cannot augment productivity. Thus, IV also does not hold strong. However, it is the right of an individual to get the post for which he fulfils the eligibility criteria, whatever be his extra merits. Hence, argument III holds strong. 32. Option A The need of today is to put to better use the underutilized human resources. Computers with better and speedy efficiency can accomplish this. So, argument I holds, while II does not. Computerization is a much beneficial project and investment in it is not at all a waste. So, III is not strong. Further, development in a new field is not a matter of merely following up other countries. So, IV also does not hold strong. 33. Option E Only III is strong. The lure of earning private tuitions reduces the efforts and devotion of the teachers towards the students in schools. So, if tuitions are banned, students can benefit from their teachers knowledge in the 234

REASONING MADE EASY


school itself. So, argument III holds strong while I does not. However, a person cannot be barred from earning more just because he already has a good salary. So, argument IV is vague. Further, the unemployed people thriving on tuitions can survive with the school teachers holding tuitions too, if they are capable enough to guide the students well. So, argument II also does not hold strong. 34. Option D Today’s children are to make up future citizens of the country and so it is absolutely essential to make them learned, more responsible, more innovative and self-dependent by imparting them education. So, argument II holds strong while I and IV do not. Besides, the goal of literacy cannot be denied for want of infrastructure. So, argument III also does not hold. 35. Option B Trade unions provide a common platform for the workers to voice their demands and protests and thus ensure that they are not subdued or exploited. So, argument II holds strong, while I and III do not, besides, the idea of imitation of other countries in the implementation of a certain policy holds no relevance. So, argument IV also does not hold strong.

235

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 21 Statement and Assumptions Directions (Q. 1-5): In each question below is given a statement followed by two assumptions numbered I and II. You have to consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the assumptions is implicit in the statement. Give answer: a) If only assumption I is implicit b) If only assumption II is implicit c) If either I or II is implicit d) If neither I nor II is implicit e) If both I and II are implicit 1. Statement: You are hereby appointed as a programmer with a probation period of one year and your performance will be reviewed at the end of the period for confirmation. Assumptions: I. The performance of an individual generally is not known at the time of appointment offer. II. Generally an individual tries to prove his worth in the probation period. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 2. Statement: It is desirable to put the child in school at the age of 5 or so. Assumptions: I. At that age the child reaches appropriate level of development and is ready to learn. II. The schools do not admit children after six years of age. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit a) Both I and II are implicit 3. Statement: In order to bring punctuality in our office, we must provide conveyance allowance to our employees. In charge of a company tells Personnel Manager. Assumptions: 236

REASONING MADE EASY

I. II.


Conveyance allowance will not help in bringing punctuality. Discipline and reward should always go hand in hand. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit a) Both I and II are implicit

4. Statement: Unemployment allowance should be given to all unemployed Indian youth above 18 years of age. Assumptions: I. There are unemployed youth in India who needs monetary support. II. The Government has sufficient funds to provide allowance to all unemployed youth. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit a) Both I and II are implicit 5. Statement: If you trouble me, I will slap you. A mother warns her child. Assumptions: I. With the warning, the child may stop troubling her. II. All children are basically naughty. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit a) Both I and II are implicit

Directions (Q. 6-10): In each question below is given a statement followed by two assumptions numbered I and II. You have to consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the assumptions is implicit in the statement. Give answer: a) If only assumption I is implicit b) If only assumption II is implicit c) If either I or II is implicit d) If neither I nor II is implicit e) If both I and II are implicit 6. Statement: The Government has decided to levy 2% on the tax amount payable for funding drought relief programmes. Assumptions: 237

REASONING MADE EASY

I. II.


The Government does not have sufficient money to fund drought relief programmes. The amount collected by way of surcharge may be adequate to fund the drought relief programes. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit

7. Statement: Detergents should be used to clean clothes. Assumptions: I. Detergents form more lather. II. Detergents help to dislodge grease and dirt. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 8. Statement: It will be a substantial achievement in the field of education if one provides one school for every village in our country and enforce attendance. Assumptions: I. Children in villages do not attend school regularly. II. Providing school to every village is desirable. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 9. Statement: The Government has decided to disinvest large chunk of its equity in select public sector undertaking for a better fiscal management. Assumptions: I. The amount generated out of the disinvestment process may reduce substantially the mounting fiscal deficits. II. There will be enough demand in the market for the shares of these undertakings. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 10. Statement: Never before such a lucid book was available on the topic. 238

REASONING MADE EASY


Assumptions: I. Some other books were available onthis topic. II. You can write lucid books on very few topics. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit Directions (Q. 11-15): In each question below is given a statement followed by two assumptions numbered I and II. You have to consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the assumptions is implicit in the statement. Give answer: a) If only assumption I is implicit b) If only assumption II is implicit c) If either I or II is implicit d) If neither I nor II is implicit e) If both I and II are implicit 11. Statement: The Government has decided to pay compensation to the tune of Rs.1 Lakh to the family membes of those who are killed in railway accidents. Assumptions: I. The Government has enough funds to meet the expenses due to compensation. II. There may be reduction in incidents of railway accidents in near future. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 12. Statement: Films have become indispensable for the entertainment of people. Assumptions: I. Films are the only media of entertainment. II. People enjoy films. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 239

REASONING MADE EASY


13. Statement: Of all the newspapers published in Mumbai, readership of the “Times” is the largest in the Metropolis. Assumptions: Times’ is not popular in mofussil areas. I. Times’ has the popular feature of cartoons on burning social and II. political issues. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 14. Statement: Apart from the entertainment value of television, its educational value cannot be ignored. Assumptions: I. People take television to be a means of entertainment only. II. The educational value of television is not realised properly. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 15. Statement: Children are influenced more by their teachers nowadays. Assumptions: I. The children consider teachers as their models. A large amount of children’s time is spent in school. II. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit

Directions (Q. 16-20): In each question below is given a statement followed by two assumptions numbered I and II. You have to consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the assumptions is implicit in the statement. Give answer: a) If only assumption I is implicit b) If only assumption II is implicit c) If either I or II is implicit d) If neither I nor II is implicit e) If both I and II are implicit

240

REASONING MADE EASY


16. Statement: A’s advice to B – “Go to Jammu via Amritsar – The shortest route”. Assumptions: I. B wishes to go to Jammu. II. A gives advice to everybody. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 17. Statement: All existing inequalities can be reduced, if not utterly eradicated, action of governments or by revolutionary change of government. Assumptions: I. Inequality is a manmade phenomenon. II. No person would voluntarily part with what he possesses. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 18. Statement: The campaign of Keep Your City Clean’ started by the Civil Council did not evoke any response from the citizens. Assumptions: I. People do not desire to keep their city clean. II. The Civil Council has failed in its campaign. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 19. Statement: The district administration has issued a circular to all the farmers under its jurisdiction advising them for not using pesticides indiscriminately as it may pollute the ground water. Assumptions: I. People may stop using ground water if the farmers continue to use pesticides indiscriminately. II. Farmers may refrain from using pesticides indiscriminately. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 241

REASONING MADE EASY


20. Statement: The coffee powder of company X is quite better in taste than the much advertised coffee of company Y. Assumptions: I. If your product is not good, your spend more on advertisement. II. Some people are tempted to buy a product by the advertisement. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit

Directions (Q. 21-25): In each question below is given a statement followed by two assumptions numbered I and II. You have to consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the assumptions is implicit in the statement. Give answer: a) If only assumption I is implicit b) If only assumption II is implicit c) If either I or II is implicit d) If neither I nor II is implicit e) If both I and II are implicit 21. Statement: Because of the large number of potholes in road X, reaching airport in time has become difficult. Assumptions: I. Reaching airport in time may not be always necessary. II. There is no other convenient road to the airport. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 22. Statement: Safety and health practices in many Indian companies are well below the international standards. Assumptions: I. International standards of health and safety are ideal and unrealistic. II. Indian organizations do not consider safety and health management as their prime social responsibility. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 242

REASONING MADE EASY


23. Statement: Greater public participation results in good civic governance. Statement of Municipal Commissioner of City A. Assumptions: I. The municipal office is not competent to effect good civic administration. II. Good civic governance is a matter of collective will and effort of the people and administration. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 24. Statement: The regulatory authority has set up a review committee tofind out the reasons for unstable stock prices. Assumptions: I. The investors may regain confidence in stock market by this decision. II. The review committee has the expertise to find out the causes for volatility in the stock market. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 25. Statement: Please note that the company will provide accommodation to only outside candidates if selected. A condition in an advertisement. Assumptions: I. The local candidates would be having some other arrangement for their stay. II. The company plans to select only local candidates. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit

Directions (Q. 26-30): In each question below is given a statement followed by two assumptions numbered I and II. You have to consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the assumptions is implicit in the statement. Give answer: a) If only assumption I is implicit 243

REASONING MADE EASY

b) c) d) e)


If only assumption II is implicit If either I or II is implicit If neither I nor II is implicit If both I and II are implicit

26. Statement: Many historians have done more harm than good by distorting truth. Assumptions: I. People believe what is reported by the historians. II. Historians are seldom expected to depict the truth. In each question below is given a statement followed by two assumptions numbered I and II. You have to consider the statement and the following assumptions and decide which of the assumptions is implicit in the statement.

Give answer: a) If only assumption I is implicit b) If only assumption II is implicit c) If either I or II is implicit d) If neither I nor II is implicit e) If both I and II are implicit 27. Statement: As there is a great demand, every person seeking tickets of the programme will be given five tickets. Assumptions: I. The organizers are not keen on selling the tickets. II. No one is interested in getting more than five tickets. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 28. Statement” Computer education should start at schools itself. Assummptions: I. Learning computers is easy. II. Computer education fetches jobs easily. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit 29. Statement: If he is intellegent, he will pass the examination. Assumptions: I. To pass, he must be intelligent. II. He will pass the examination. 244

REASONING MADE EASY

a) b) c) d) e)


Only assumption I is implicit Only assumption II is implicit Either I or II is implicit Neither I nor II is implicit Both I and II are implicit

30. Statement: Today I must satisfy myself only by looking at a pink headed duck in an encyclopaedia. Assumptions: I. Pink headed ducks are as good as extinct now. II. People refer to encyclopaedia to know only about things which do not exist now. a) Only assumption I is implicit b) Only assumption II is implicit c) Either I or II is implicit d) Neither I nor II is implicit e) Both I and II are implicit

Answers: 1. Option E The performance of the individual has to be tested over a span of time as the statement mentions. So, I is implicit. The statement mentions that the individua l’s worth shall be reviewed before confirmation. So, II is also implicit. 2. Option A Since the statement talks of putting the child in school at the age of 5, it means that the child is mentally prepared for the same at this age. So, I is implicit, But nothing about admission after 6 years of age is mentioned in the statement. So, II is not implicit. 3. Option B Assumption I goes against the statement. So, it is not implicit. The allowance will serve as a reward to the employees and shall provoke them to come on time. So, II is implicit. 4. Option A I directly follows from the statement and so is implicit. Also, the statement is a suggestion and does not tell about a Government policy or its position of funds. So, II is not implicit. 5. Option A The mothe warns her child with the expectation that he would stop troubling her. So, I is implicit. The general nature of children cannot be derived from the statement. So, II is not implicit. 245

REASONING MADE EASY


6. Option E Since a surcharge has been levied to fund drought relief programmes, it follow the Government does not have sufficient money for the same. So, I is implicit. Besides, the percentage of surcharge must have been decided after studying the expected inflow in relation to amount of funds required. So, II is also implicit. 7. Option B Nothing is mentioned about lather formation by the detergent. So, I is not implicit. Also, detergents should be used as they clean clothes better and more easily. So, II is implicit. 8. Option E The statement lays stress on enforcing attendance. This implies that children in villages do not attend school regularly. So, I is implicit. Besides, the statement calls one school for every village a substantial achievement. So, II is also implicit. 9. Option A The fact given in I directly follows from the phrase -------- for a better fiscal management in the statement. So, I is implicit. However, the public response to the new policy cannot be ascertained. So, II is not implicit. 10. Option A It follows from the statement that books on this topic were available before also but they were not lucid. So, I is implicit. But a general comment as II cannot be made from the given statement. So, II is not implicit. 11. Option A The amount of compensation must have been decided keeping in mind the monetary position of the Government. So, I is implicit. However, nothing can be said about the frequency of railway accidents in future. So, II is not implicit. 12. Option B Films are indispensable’ does not mean that they are the only means of entertainment. So, I is not implicit. II follows from the statement. So, it is implicit. 13. Option D Neither the volume of readership of the Times’ in areas other than the Metropolis nor the reason for its huge acclamation is evident from the statement. So, neither I nor II is implicit. 14. Option E 246

REASONING MADE EASY


The statement makes the first assumption clear though educational value is not to be ignored. So, I is implicit. That the educational value must not be ignored also shows that educational value is not realised properly. So, II is also implicit. 15. Option A It is because children consider teachers as their model that they are more influenced by them. So, I is implicit. It is not necessary that the children are influenced by teachers because they spend much time in school. So, II is not implicit. 16. Option A A has advised B the route to Jammu. This means that B wishes to go to Jammu. So, I is implicit. The statement mentions only A’s advice to B. So, II is not implicit. 17. Option A Since inequality can be reduced, it means that it is not natural but created. So, I is implicit. Nothing is mentioned about people’s response. So, II is not implicit. 18. Option E According to the statement, the campaign did not get any response from citizens. This means that people are not interested in keeping the city clean and the campaign has failed. So, both I and II implicit. 19. Option B The district administration has issued a circular to make the farmers aware of hazards that indiscriminate use of pesticides poses to ground water and plead them to refrain from the same. So, II is implicit. However, I cannot be assumed from the given statement and so it is not implicit. 20. Option B 21. Option B The statement presents the issue of not reaching airport in time’ as a problem. This means that reaching airport in time is necessary. So, I is not implicit. Besides, it is mentioned that reaching airport in time has become difficult due to large number of potholes in road X. This implies that road X is the only possible way. So, II is implicit. 22. Option B The statement talks about the safety and health practices in Indian companies being far below international standards. It is clearly a criticism of Indian organizations not paying considerable attention to these aspects. 247

REASONING MADE EASY


So, II is implicit. The intenationalstandards demand perfection and are, in no way, non-achievable. So, I is not implicit. 23. Option B The statement stresses on the fact that though civic governance is the task of the municipal body, but all the tasks done come ou to be more fruitful if the general public lends a helping hand in the same. So, only II is implicit. 24. Option E I mentions the aim for which the step talked about in the statement, has been undertaken while II mentions the essential requirement for it. So, both I and II are implicit. 25. Option A The statement mentions that the company intends to provide accommodation only to outside candidates. This means that local candidates would have to arrange accommodation on their own and that the company may select local as well as outside candidates. Thus, only I is implicit. 26. Option A The fact that historians have done harm by distorting truth, means that people believe what is reported by the historians. So, I is implicit. II does not follow from the statement and is not implicit. 27. Option D The organizers are adopting this policy not to reduce the sale but to cope up with great demand so that everyone can get the ticket. So, I is not implicit. Also, due to great demand, the maximum number of tickets one person can get has been reduced to five So, II is also not implicit. 28. Option A Computer educabe started at the school level only if it is easy. So, I is implicit. In the statement, nothing is mentioned about the link between jobs and computer education. So, II is not implicit. 29. Option A The statement mentions that he will pass if he is intelligent. So, I is implicit. Further, this means that it is not necessary that he will pass. So, II is not implicit. 30. Since the narrator talks ofsatisfying himself by just looking at a picture in encyclopaedia, it means that pink headed ducks are not to be seen alive. So, I is implicit. But II does not follow from the statement and is not implicit.

248

REASONING MADE EASY


Chapter – 22 Statement and Conclusions Directions (Q. 1-5): In each question below is given a statement followed by two conclusions numbered I and II. You have to assume everything in the statement to be true, then consider the two conclusions together and decide which of them logically follows beyond a reasonable doubt from the information given in the statement. Give answer: a) If only conclusion I follows b) If only conclusion II follows c) If either I or II follows d) If neither I nor II follows and e) If both I and II follow 1. Statement: In a one day cricket match, the total runs made by a team were 200. Out of these 160 runs were made by spinners. Conclusions: I. 80% of the team consists of spinners. II. The opening batsmen were spinners. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows e) Both I and II are follow 2. Statement: The old order changed place to new. Conclusions: I. Change is the law of nature. II. Discard old ideas because they are old. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 3. Statement: Government has spoiled many top ranking financial institutions by appointing bureaucrats as Directors of these institutions. Conclusions: I. Government should appoint Directors of the financial institutes taking into consideration the expertise of the person in the area of finance. 249

REASONING MADE EASY

II.


The Director of the financial institute should have expertise commensurate with the financial work carried out by the institute. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow

4. Statement: Population increase coupled with depleting resources is going to be the scenario of many developing countries in days to come. Conclusions: I. The population of developing countries will not continue to increase in future. II. It will be very difficult for the governments of developing countries to provide its people decent quality of life. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 5. Statement: Prime age school going children in urban India have now become avid as well as more regular viewers of television, even in households without a T.V. As a result, there has been an alarming decline in the extent of readership of newspapers. Conclusions: I. Method of increasing the readership of newspapes should be devised. II. A team of experts should be sent to other countries to study the impact of T.V. on the readership of newspapers. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow

Directions (Q. 6-10): In each question below is given a statement followed by two conclusions numbered I and II. You have to assume everything in the statement to be true, then consider the two conclusions together and decide which of them logically follows beyond a reasonable doubt from the information given in the statement. Give answer: a) If only conclusion I follows b) If only conclusion II follows c) If either I or II follows 250

REASONING MADE EASY


d) If neither I nor II follows and e) If both I and II follow 6. Statement: The manager humiliated Sachin in the presence of his colleagues. Conclusions: I. The manager did not like Sachin. II. Sachin was not popular with his colleagues. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 7. Statement: Women’s organizations in India have welcomed the amendment of the Industrial Employment Rules 1946 to curb sexual harassment at the work place. Conclusions: I. Sexual harassment of women at work place is more prevalent in India as compared to other developed countries. II. Many organizations in India will stop recruiting women to avoid such problems. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 8. Statement: Nation X faced growing international opposition for its decision to explode eight nuclear weapons at its test site. Conclusions: I. The citizens of the nation favoured the decision. II. Some powerful countries do not want other nations to become as powerful as they are. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 9. Statement: In a highly centralised power structure, in which even senior cabinet ministers are prepared to reduce themselves to pathetic countries or yesmen airing views that are primarily intended to anticipate or reflect the Prime Minister’s own performances, there can be no place for any consensus that is quite different from real or contrived unanimity of 251

REASONING MADE EASY


opinion, expressed through a well orchestrated endorsement of the leader’s actions. Conclusions: I. The Ministers play safe by not giving anti-government views. II. The Prime Minister does not encourage his colleagues to render their own views. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 10. Statement: National Aluminium Company has moved India from a position of shortage to self sufficiency in the metal. Conclusions: I. Previously, India had to import aluminium. II. With this speed, it can soon become a foreign exchange earner. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow

Directions (Q. 11-15): In each question below is given a statement followed by two conclusions numbered I and II. You have to assume everything in the statement to be true, then consider the two conclusions together and decide which of them logically follows beyond a reasonable doubt from the information given in the statement. Give answer: a) If only conclusion I follows b) If only conclusion II follows c) If either I or II follows d) If neither I nor II follows and e) If both I and II follow 11. Statement: People who speak too much against dowry are those who had taken it themselves. Conclusions: I. It is easier said than done. II. People have double standards. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 252

REASONING MADE EASY


12. Statement: The national norm is 100 beds per thousand populations but in this state, 150 beds per thousand are available in the hospitals. Conclusions: I. Our national norm is appropriate. The state’s health system is taking adequate care in this regard. II. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 13. Statement: Our securities carry market risk. Consult your investment advisor or agent before investing. Conclusions: I. One should not invest in securities. II. The investment advisor calculates the market risk with certainty. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 14. Statement: Money plays a vital role in politics. Conclusions: I. The poor can never become politicians. II. All the rich men take part in politics. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 15. Statement: Vegetable prices are soaring in the market. Conclusions: I. Vegetables are becoming a rare commodity. II. People cannot eat vegetables. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow

Directions (Q. 16-20): In each question below is given a statement followed by two conclusions numbered I and II. You have to assume everything in the statement to be true, then consider the two conclusions together and decide which of them 253

REASONING MADE EASY


logically follows beyond a reasonable doubt from the information given in the statement.

Give answer: a) If only conclusion I follows b) If only conclusion II follows c) If either I or II follows d) If neither I nor II follows and e) If both I and II follow 16. Statement: Any student who does not behave properly while in the school brings bad name to himself and also for the school. Conclusions: I. Such student should be removed from the school. II. Stricter discipline does not improve behaviour of the students. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 17. Statement: A Corporate General Manager asked four managers to either submit their resignations by the next day or face termination orders from service. Three of them had submitted their resignations by that evening. Conclusions: I. The next day, the remaining manager would also resign. II. The General Manager would terminate his services the next day. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows a) Both I and II are follow 18. Statement: Only good singers are invited in the conference. No one without sweet voice is a good singer. Conclusions: I. All invited singers in the conference have sweet voice. II. Those singers who do not have sweet voice are not invited in the conference. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows e) Both I and II are follow

254

REASONING MADE EASY


19. Statement: To cultivate interest in reading, the school has made it compulsory from June this year for each student to read two books per week and submit a weekly report on the books. Conclusions: I. Interest in reading can be created by force. II. Some students will eventually develop interest in reading. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows e) Both I and II are follow 20. Statement: Applications of applicants who do no fulfil eligibility criteria and/or who do not submit applications before last date will be summarily rejected and will not be called for the written test. Conclusions: I. Those who are called for the written test are those who fulfil eligibility criteria and have submitted their applications before last date. II. Written test will be held only after scrutiny of applications. a) Only conclusion I follows b) Only conclusion II follows c) Either I or II follows d) Neither I nor II follows e) Both I and II are follow

Answers: 1. Option D According to the statement, 80% of the total runs were made by spinners. So, I does not follow. Nothing about the opening batsmen is mentioned in the statement. So, II also does not follow. 2. Option A I directly follows from the given statement. Also, it is mentioned that old ideas are replaced by new ones, as thinking changes with the progressing time. So, II does not follow. 3. Option E According to the statement, Government has spoiled financial institutions by appointing bureacrats as Directors. This means that only those persons should be appointed as Directors who are experts in finance and are acquainted with the financial work of the institute. So, both I and II follow. 4. Option B 255

REASONING MADE EASY


The fact given in I is quite contrary to the given statement. So, I does not follow. II mentions the direct implications of the state discussed in the statement. Thus, II follows. 5. Option D The statement concentrates on the increasing viewership of T.V. and does not stress either on increasing the readership of newspapers or making studies regarding the same. So, neither I nor II follows.

6. Option D The manager might have humiliated Sachin not because of his dislike but on account of certain negligence or mistake on his part. So, I does not follow. Also, nothing about Sachin’s rapport with his colleagues can be reduced from the statement. So, II also does not follow. 7. Option D The fact that a certain rule has been more welcomed in a certain coutry does not imply that the problem is more prevalent there. So, I does not follow. Also, the amendment seeks to discourage only sexual harassment of women and shall in no way discourage employment of women. So, II also does not follow. 8. Option D Neither the citizens response to the decision nor the reason for opposition by other nations can be deduced from the statement. So, neither I nor II follows. 9. Option A According to the statement, even senior cabinet ministers are always ready to conform to the Prime Minister’s views. So, I follows. However, II contradicts the given statement and so does not follow. 10. Option E According to the statement, National Aluminium Company has moved India from a position of shortage in the past to self sufficiency in the present. This means that previously, India had to import aluminium. So, I follows. Also, it can be deduced that if production increases at the same rate, India can export it in future. So, II also follows. 11. Option E The statement implies that it is easier to say than to do something and what people say is different from what they do. So, both I and II follow. 12. Option B 256

Reasoning Book.pdf

Recommend Documents